*** empty log message ***
[bpt/emacs.git] / etc / NEWS
CommitLineData
d874e913 1GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. 2000-08-14
404fa7d6 2Copyright (C) 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
3See the end for copying conditions.
4
5Please send Emacs bug reports to bug-gnu-emacs@gnu.org.
3787e12e 6For older news, see the file ONEWS
a933dad1
DL
7
8\f
251584f3
DL
9* Installation Changes in Emacs 21.1
10
f4988be7
GM
11** Support for GNU/Linux on IA64 machines has been added.
12
1fa28578
GM
13** `movemail' defaults to supporting POP. You can turn this off using
14the --without-pop configure option, should that be necessary.
15
16** There are new configure options associated with the support for
163ea954
RS
17images and toolkit scrollbars. Use the --help option in `configure'
18to list them.
6344985d 19
d5483ab1 20** There is a new configure option `--without-xim' that instructs
d874e913 21Emacs to not use X Input Methods (XIM), if these are available.
5ed8d5af
DL
22
23** There is a new configure option `--disable-largefile' to omit
24Unix-98-style support for large files if that is available.
25
26** You can build a 64-bit Emacs for SPARC/Solaris systems which
27support 64-bit executables. See etc/MACHINES for instructions.
f4988be7 28
1fa28578
GM
29\f
30* Changes in Emacs 21.1
31
d7b38c05
GM
32** Polish and German translations of Emacs' reference card have been
33added. They are named `refcard-pl.tex' and `refcard-de.tex'.
34Postscript files are included.
35
36** A reference card for Dired has been added. Its name is
37`dired-ref.tex'.
38
25ad1371
GM
39** The new variable `auto-mode-interpreter-regexp' contains a regular
40expression matching interpreters, for file mode determination.
41
42This regular expression is matched against the first line of a file to
43determine the file's mode in `set-auto-mode' when Emacs can't deduce a
44mode from the file's name. If it matches, the file is assumed to be
45interpreted by the interpreter matched by the second group of the
46regular expression. The mode is then determined as the mode
47associated with that interpreter in `interpreter-mode-alist'.
48
f0298744
DL
49** C-down-mouse-3 is bound differently. Now if the menu bar is not
50displayed it pops up a menu containing the items which would be on the
51menu bar. If the menu bar is displayed, it pops up the major mode
52menu or the Edit menu if there is no major mode menu.
53
9a8d84ca
DL
54** Variable `load-path' is no longer customizable because it contains
55a version-dependent component.
56
d76c03ea
GM
57** The <delete> function key is now bound to `delete-char' by default.
58Note that this takes effect only on window systems. On TTYs, Emacs
59will receive ASCII 127 when the DEL key is pressed. This
60character is still bound as before.
61
3b4fa1b2
DL
62** Item Save Options on the Options menu allows saving options set
63using that menu.
64
40e857ea
DL
65** New function executable-make-buffer-file-executable-if-script-p is
66suitable as an after-save-hook as an alternative to executable-chmod.
67
c08398de
DL
68** The most preferred coding-system is now used to save a buffer if
69buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and it is safe for the buffer
70contents. (The most preferred is set by set-language-environment or
71by M-x prefer-coding-system.) Thus if you visit an ASCII file and
72insert a non-ASCII character from your current language environment,
73the file will be saved silently with the appropriate coding.
74Previously you would be prompted for a safe coding system.
75
3d6cd763
GM
76** New variable `inhibit-iso-escape-detection' determines if Emacs'
77coding system detection algorithm should pay attention to ISO2022's
78escape sequences. If this variable is non-nil, the algorithm ignores
79such escape sequences. The default value is nil, and it is
80recommended not to change it except for the special case that you
07b14857 81always want to read any escape code verbatim. If you just want to
3d6cd763 82read a specific file without decoding escape codes, use C-x RET c
07b14857
KH
83(`universal-coding-system-argument'). For instance, C-x RET c latin-1
84RET C-x C-f filename RET.
26ae8525 85
0b8a3a6d
DL
86** Variable `default-korean-keyboard' is initialized properly from the
87environment variable `HANGUL_KEYBOARD_TYPE'.
88
89** C-u C-x = provides detailed information about the character at
90point in a pop-up window.
91
92** New command M-x list-charset-chars reads a character set name and
93displays all characters in that character set.
94
95** M-x set-terminal-coding-system (C-x RET t) now allows CCL-based
96coding systems such as cpXXX and cyrillic-koi8.
97
5cb6a58e
SM
98** M-; now calls comment-dwim which tries to do something clever based
99on the context.
100
a1b8d58b
GM
101** The function `getenv' is now callable interactively.
102
6e417ca5
DL
103** The many obsolete language `setup-...-environment' commands have
104been removed -- use `set-language-environment'.
105
5898e075
DL
106** New user options `display-time-mail-face' and
107`display-time-use-mail-icon' control the appearance of mode-line mail
108indicator used by the display-time package. On a suitable display the
109indicator can be an icon and is mouse-sensitive.
110
abfcc168
GM
111** Emacs' auto-save list files are now by default stored in a
112sub-directory `.emacs.d/auto-save-list/' of the user's home directory.
874d1079 113(On MS-DOS, this subdirectory's name is `_emacs.d/auto-save.list/'.)
abfcc168
GM
114You can customize `auto-save-list-prefix' to change this location.
115
cc181e95
GM
116** On window-systems, additional space can be put between text lines
117on the display using several methods
118
119- By setting frame parameter `line-spacing' to PIXELS. PIXELS must be
120a positive integer, and specifies that PIXELS number of pixels should
121be put below text lines on the affected frame or frames.
122
123- By setting X resource `lineSpacing', class `LineSpacing'. This is
124equivalent ot specifying the frame parameter.
125
da4496b6 126- By specifying `--line-spacing=N' or `-lsp N' on the command line.
cc181e95
GM
127
128- By setting buffer-local variable `line-spacing'. The meaning is
129the same, but applies to the a particular buffer only.
130
3b4fa1b2 131** The new command `clone-indirect-buffer' can be used to create
1c459486 132an indirect buffer that is a twin copy of the current buffer. The
3b4fa1b2 133command `clone-indirect-buffer-other-window', bound to C-x 4 c,
1c459486 134does the same but displays the indirect buffer in another window.
0daee095 135
176256a1 136** New user options `backup-directory-alist' and
3bbc50af
DL
137`make-backup-file-name-function' control the placement of backups,
138typically in a single directory or in an invisible sub-directory.
176256a1 139
dd0add8e
DL
140** New commands iso-iso2sgml and iso-sgml2iso convert between Latin-1
141characters and the corresponding SGML (HTML) entities.
142
699238d9
GM
143** Emacs now refuses to load compiled Lisp files which weren't
144compiled with Emacs. Set `load-dangerous-libraries' to t to change
145this behavior.
146
147The reason for this change is an incompatible change in XEmacs' byte
148compiler. Files compiled with XEmacs can contain byte codes that let
149Emacs dump core.
150
151** New X resources recognized
100b3cbb 152
7233c5bd
GM
153*** The X resource `synchronous', class `Synchronous', specifies
154whether Emacs should run in synchronous mode. Synchronous mode
155is useful for debugging X problems.
156
157Example:
158
699238d9 159 emacs.synchronous: true
7233c5bd 160
100b3cbb
GM
161*** The X resource `visualClass, class `VisualClass', specifies the
162visual Emacs should use. The resource's value should be a string of
163the form `CLASS-DEPTH', where CLASS is the name of the visual class,
164and DEPTH is the requested color depth as a decimal number. Valid
165visual class names are
166
167 TrueColor
168 PseudoColor
169 DirectColor
170 StaticColor
171 GrayScale
172 StaticGray
173
174Visual class names specified as X resource are case-insensitive, i.e.
175`pseudocolor', `Pseudocolor' and `PseudoColor' all have the same
176meaning.
177
178The program `xdpyinfo' can be used to list the visual classes
179supported on your display, and which depths they have. If
180`visualClass' is not specified, Emacs uses the display's default
181visual.
182
183Example:
184
699238d9 185 emacs.visualClass: TrueColor-8
100b3cbb
GM
186
187*** The X resource `privateColormap', class `PrivateColormap',
188specifies that Emacs should use a private colormap if it is using the
189default visual, and that visual is of class PseudoColor. Recognized
190resource values are `true' or `on'.
191
192Example:
193
699238d9 194 emacs.privateColormap: true
100b3cbb 195
0d0c76b8
EZ
196** The menu bar configuration has changed. The new configuration is
197more CUA-compliant. The most significant change is that Options is
198now a separate menu-bar item, with Mule and Customize as its submenus.
199
42088c12 200** User-option `show-cursor-in-non-selected-windows' controls how to
c60ea02e 201display the cursor in non-selected windows. If nil, no cursor is
42088c12
GM
202shown, if non-nil a hollow box cursor is shown. This option can
203be customized.
c60ea02e 204
31047e0d
DL
205** The variable `echo-keystrokes' may now have a floating point value.
206
b02786f9
GM
207** C-x 5 1 runs the new command delete-other-frames which deletes
208all frames except the selected one.
209
3261c1d8
DL
210** If your init file is compiled (.emacs.elc), `user-init-file' is set
211to the source name (.emacs.el), if that exists, after loading it.
212
ffe36136 213** The help string specified for a menu-item whose definition contains
aa78a4f3
EZ
214the property `:help HELP' is now displayed under X, on MS-Windows, and
215MS-DOS, either in the echo area or with tooltips. Many standard menus
216displayed by Emacs now have help strings.
217
218** Highlighting of mouse-sensitive regions is now supported in the
219MS-DOS version of Emacs.
ffe36136 220
559cee90
DL
221** New user option `read-mail-command' specifies a command to use to
222read mail from the menu etc.
223
271b4185
GM
224** Hexl contains a new command `hexl-insert-hex-string' which inserts
225a string of hexadecimal numbers read from the mini-buffer.
226
0daee095
GM
227** Changes in Texinfo mode.
228
229** A couple of new key bindings have been added for inserting Texinfo
230macros
231
232 Key binding Macro
233 -------------------------
234 C-c C-c C-s @strong
235 C-c C-c C-e @emph
236 C-c C-c u @url
237 C-c C-c q @quotation
238 C-c C-c m @email
239
559cee90
DL
240** Changes in Outline mode.
241
242There is now support for Imenu to index headings. A new command
243`outline-headers-as-kill' copies the visible headings in the region to
244the kill ring, e.g. to produce a table of contents.
245
956777b3
GM
246** Changes to Show Paren mode.
247
248*** Overlays used by Show Paren mode now use a priority property.
249The new user option show-paren-priority specifies the priority to
250use. Default is 1000.
251
404fa7d6
DL
252** New command M-x check-parens can be used to find unbalanced paren
253groups and strings in buffers in Lisp mode (or other modes).
254
8964fec7
SM
255** You can now easily create new *Info* buffers using either M-x clone-buffer
256or C-u m <entry> RET. M-x clone-buffer can also be used on *Help* and
257several other special buffers.
258
39783d73
WP
259** Emacs can now support 'wheeled' mice (such as the MS IntelliMouse)
260under XFree86. To enable this, simply put (mwheel-install) in your
261.emacs file.
262
263The variables `mwheel-follow-mouse' and `mwheel-scroll-amount'
264determine where and by how much buffers are scrolled.
265
d35fce81
GM
266** Listing buffers with M-x list-buffers (C-x C-b) now shows
267abbreviated file names. Abbreviations can be customized by changing
268`directory-abbrev-alist'.
269
df5a1902
GM
270** Reading from the mini-buffer now reads from standard input if Emacs
271is running in batch mode. For example,
272
273 (message "%s" (read t))
274
275will read a Lisp expression from standard input and print the result
276to standard output.
277
a933dad1
DL
278** Faces and frame parameters.
279
280There are four new faces `scroll-bar', `border', `cursor' and `mouse'.
281Setting the frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
282`scroll-bar-background' sets foreground and background color of face
283`scroll-bar' and vice versa. Setting frame parameter `border-color'
284sets the background color of face `border' and vice versa. Likewise
285for frame parameters `cursor-color' and face `cursor', and frame
286parameter `mouse-color' and face `mouse'.
287
288Changing frame parameter `font' sets font-related attributes of the
289`default' face and vice versa. Setting frame parameters
79214ddf 290`foreground-color' or `background-color' sets the colors of the
a933dad1
DL
291`default' face and vice versa.
292
f77a4a8a
GM
293** New face `menu'.
294
295The face `menu' can be used to change colors and font of Emacs' menus.
296Setting the font of LessTif/Motif menus is currently not supported;
297attempts to set the font are ignored in this case.
298
a933dad1
DL
299** New frame parameter `screen-gamma' for gamma correction.
300
301The new frame parameter `screen-gamma' specifies gamma-correction for
302colors. Its value may be nil, the default, in which case no gamma
303correction occurs, or a number > 0, usually a float, that specifies
304the screen gamma of a frame's display.
305
306PC monitors usually have a screen gamma of 2.2. smaller values result
307in darker colors. You might want to try a screen gamma of 1.5 for LCD
308color displays. The viewing gamma Emacs uses is 0.4545. (1/2.2).
309
310The X resource name of this parameter is `screenGamma', class
311`ScreenGamma'.
312
313** Emacs has a new redisplay engine.
314
315The new redisplay handles characters of variable width and height.
316Italic text can be used without redisplay problems. Fonts containing
317oversized characters, i.e. characters larger than the logical height
318of a font can be used. Images of various formats can be displayed in
319the text.
320
321** Emacs has a new face implementation.
322
323The new faces no longer fundamentally use X font names to specify the
324font. Instead, each face has several independent attributes--family,
325height, width, weight and slant--that it may or may not specify.
326These attributes can be merged from various faces, and then together
327specify a font.
328
329Faces are supported on terminals that can display color or fonts.
330These terminal capabilities are auto-detected. Details can be found
331under Lisp changes, below.
332
333** New default font is Courier 12pt.
334
335** When using a windowing terminal, Emacs window now has a cursor of
336its own. When the window is selected, the cursor is solid; otherwise,
337it is hollow.
338
339** Bitmap areas to the left and right of windows are used to display
340truncation marks, continuation marks, overlay arrows and alike. The
341foreground, background, and stipple of these areas can be changed by
342customizing face `fringe'.
343
344** The mode line under X is now drawn with shadows by default. You
345can change its appearance by modifying the face `modeline'.
346
347** LessTif support.
348
349Emacs now runs with LessTif (see <http://www.lesstif.org>). You will
350need a version 0.88.1 or later.
351
352** Toolkit scroll bars.
353
354Emacs now uses toolkit scrollbars if available. When configured for
355LessTif/Motif, it will use that toolkit's scrollbar. Otherwise, when
356configured for Lucid and Athena widgets, it will use the Xaw3d scroll
357bar if Xaw3d is available. You can turn off the use of toolkit scroll
358bars by specifying `--with-toolkit-scroll-bars=no' when configuring
359Emacs.
360
361When you encounter problems with the Xaw3d scroll bar, watch out how
362Xaw3d is compiled on your system. If the Makefile generated from
363Xaw3d's Imakefile contains a `-DNARROWPROTO' compiler option, and your
364Emacs system configuration file `s/your-system.h' does not contain a
365define for NARROWPROTO, you might consider adding it. Take
366`s/freebsd.h' as an example.
367
368Alternatively, if you don't have access to the Xaw3d source code, take
369a look at your system's imake configuration file, for example in the
370directory `/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/config' (paths are different on
371different systems). You will find files `*.cf' there. If your
372system's cf-file contains a line like `#define NeedWidePrototypes NO',
373add a `#define NARROWPROTO' to your Emacs system configuration file.
374
375The reason for this is that one Xaw3d function uses `double' or
376`float' function parameters depending on the setting of NARROWPROTO.
377This is not a problem when Imakefiles are used because each system's
378image configuration file contains the necessary information. Since
379Emacs doesn't use imake, this has do be done manually.
380
381** Toggle buttons and radio buttons in menus.
382
383When compiled with LessTif (or Motif) support, Emacs uses toolkit
384widgets for radio and toggle buttons in menus. When configured for
385Lucid, Emacs draws radio buttons and toggle buttons similar to Motif.
386
387** Highlighting of trailing whitespace.
388
389When `show-trailing-whitespace' is non-nil, Emacs displays trailing
390whitespace in the face `trailing-whitespace'. Trailing whitespace is
391defined as spaces or tabs at the end of a line. To avoid busy
392highlighting when entering new text, trailing whitespace is not
393displayed if point is at the end of the line containing the
394whitespace.
395
396** Busy-cursor.
397
398Emacs can optionally display a busy-cursor under X. You can turn the
399display on or off by customizing group `cursor'.
400
401** Blinking cursor
402
403M-x blink-cursor-mode toggles a blinking cursor under X and on
404terminals having terminal capabilities `vi', `vs', and `ve'. Blinking
405and related parameters like frequency and delay can be customized in
406the group `cursor'.
407
408** New font-lock support mode `jit-lock-mode'.
409
410This support mode is roughly equivalent to `lazy-lock' but is
411generally faster. It supports stealth and deferred fontification.
412See the documentation of the function `jit-lock-mode' for more
413details.
414
415Font-lock uses jit-lock-mode as default support mode, so you don't
416have to do anything to activate it.
417
418** Tabs and variable-width text.
419
420Tabs are now displayed with stretch properties; the width of a tab is
421defined as a multiple of the normal character width of a frame, and is
422independent of the fonts used in the text where the tab appears.
423Thus, tabs can be used to line up text in different fonts.
424
425** Enhancements of the Lucid menu bar
426
427*** The Lucid menu bar now supports the resource "margin".
428
429 emacs.pane.menubar.margin: 5
430
79dd1637
RS
431The default margin is 4 which makes the menu bar appear like the
432LessTif/Motif one.
a933dad1 433
79dd1637
RS
434*** Arrows that indicate sub-menus are now drawn with shadows, as in
435LessTif and Motif.
a933dad1
DL
436
437** Hscrolling in C code.
438
cc181e95
GM
439Horizontal scrolling now happens automatically if
440`automatic-hscrolling' is set (the default). This setting can be
441customized.
a933dad1
DL
442
443** Tool bar support.
444
445Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. For details
446how to define a tool bar, see the page describing Lisp-level changes.
447
448** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
449
450Different parts of the mode line under X have been made
451mouse-sensitive. Moving the mouse to a mouse-sensitive part in the mode
452line changes the appearance of the mouse pointer to an arrow, and help
453about available mouse actions is displayed either in the echo area, or
454in the tooltip window if you have enabled one.
455
456Currently, the following actions have been defined:
457
458- Mouse-1 on the buffer name in the mode line switches between two
459buffers.
460
461- Mouse-2 on the buffer-name switches to the next buffer, and
462M-mouse-2 switches to the previous buffer in the buffer list.
463
464- Mouse-3 on the buffer-name displays a buffer menu.
465
559cee90 466- Mouse-2 on the read-only status in the mode line (`%' or `*')
a933dad1
DL
467toggles the read-only status.
468
469- Mouse-3 on the mode name display a minor-mode menu.
470
471** LessTif/Motif file selection dialog.
472
473When Emacs is configured to use LessTif or Motif, reading a file name
e33b0397 474from a menu will pop up a file selection dialog if `use-dialog-box' is
a933dad1
DL
475non-nil.
476
477** Emacs can display faces on TTY frames.
478
479Emacs automatically detects terminals that are able to display colors.
480Faces with a weight greater than normal are displayed extra-bright, if
481the terminal supports it. Faces with a weight less than normal and
482italic faces are displayed dimmed, if the terminal supports it.
483Underlined faces are displayed underlined if possible. Other face
163ea954
RS
484attributes such as `overline', `strike-through', and `box' are ignored
485on terminals.
a933dad1
DL
486
487** Sound support
488
2f516940 489Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and FreeBSD (Voxware
0b50c67f 490driver and native BSD driver, a.k.a. Luigi's driver). Currently
2f516940 491supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio (*.au).
a933dad1
DL
492
493** A new variable, backup-by-copying-when-privileged-mismatch, gives
494the highest file uid for which backup-by-copying-when-mismatch will be
495forced on. The assumption is that uids less than or equal to this
496value are special uids (root, bin, daemon, etc.--not real system
497users) and that files owned by these users should not change ownership,
498even if your system policy allows users other than root to edit them.
499
500The default is 200; set the variable to nil to disable the feature.
501
502** A block cursor can be drawn as wide as the glyph under it under X.
503
504As an example: if a block cursor is over a tab character, it will be
505drawn as wide as that tab on the display. To do this, set
506`x-stretch-cursor' to a non-nil value.
507
508** Empty display lines at the end of a buffer may be marked with a
509bitmap (this is similar to the tilde displayed by vi).
510
511This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable
512`indicate-empty-lines' to a non-nil value. The default value of this
513variable is found in `default-indicate-empty-lines'.
514
515** There is a new "aggressive" scrolling method.
516
517When scrolling up because point is above the window start, if the
518value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-up-aggessively' is a
519number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
520fraction of the window's height from the bottom of the window.
521
522When scrolling down because point is below the window end, if the
523value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-down-aggessively' is a
524number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
525fraction of the window's height from the top of the window.
526
527** The rectangle commands now avoid inserting undesirable spaces,
528notably at the end of lines.
529
530All these functions have been rewritten to avoid inserting unwanted
531spaces, and an optional prefix now allows them to behave the old way.
532
eee54b0e
DL
533There is a new command M-x replace-rectangle.
534
a933dad1
DL
535** The new command M-x query-replace-regexp-eval acts like
536query-replace-regexp, but takes a Lisp expression which is evaluated
537after each match to get the replacement text.
538
d5483ab1
GM
539** M-x query-replace recognizes a new command `e' (or `E') that lets
540you edit the replacement string.
4ff40dd0
GM
541
542** The new command mail-abbrev-complete-alias, bound to `M-TAB', let's
543you complete mail aliases in the text, analogous to
544lisp-complete-symbol.
545
a933dad1
DL
546** Emacs now resizes mini-windows if appropriate.
547
163ea954
RS
548If a message is longer than one line, or minibuffer contents are
549longer than one line, Emacs now resizes the minibuffer window unless
550it is on a frame of its own. You can control the maximum minibuffer
551window size by setting the following variable:
a933dad1
DL
552
553- User option: max-mini-window-height
554
555Maximum height for resizing mini-windows. If a float, it specifies a
556fraction of the mini-window frame's height. If an integer, it
557specifies a number of lines. If nil, don't resize.
558
559Default is 0.25.
560
2f72fd2f
GM
561** The command `Info-search' now uses a search history.
562
0d43b60d
GM
563** Changes to hideshow.el
564
565Hideshow is now at version 5.x. It uses a new algorithms for block
566selection and traversal and includes more isearch support.
567
568*** Generalized block selection and traversal
569
570A block is now recognized by three things: its start and end regexps
571(both strings), and a match-data selector (an integer) specifying
572which sub-expression in the start regexp serves as the place where a
573`forward-sexp'-like function can operate. Hideshow always adjusts
574point to this sub-expression before calling `hs-forward-sexp-func'
575(which for most modes evaluates to `forward-sexp').
576
577If the match-data selector is not specified, it defaults to zero,
578i.e., the entire start regexp is valid, w/ no prefix. This is
579backwards compatible with previous versions of hideshow. Please see
580the docstring for variable `hs-special-modes-alist' for details.
581
582*** Isearch support for updating mode line
583
584During incremental search, if Hideshow minor mode is active, hidden
585blocks are temporarily shown. The variable `hs-headline' records the
586line at the beginning of the opened block (preceding the hidden
587portion of the buffer), and the mode line is refreshed. When a block
588is re-hidden, the variable is set to nil.
589
590To show `hs-headline' in the mode line, you may wish to include
591something like this in your .emacs.
592
593 (add-hook 'hs-minor-mode-hook
594 (lambda ()
595 (add-to-list 'mode-line-format 'hs-headline)))
596
559cee90
DL
597** Changes to Change Log mode and Add-Log functions
598
599If you invoke `add-change-log-entry' from a backup file, it makes an
600entry appropriate for the file's parent. This is useful for making
601log entries by comparing a version with deleted functions.
602
603New command M-x change-log-merge merges another log into the current
604buffer, fixing old-style date formats if necessary.
eb2aac9d
GM
605
606Change Log mode now adds a file's version number to change log entries
607if user-option `change-log-version-info-enabled' is non-nil.
608
609The search for a file's version number is performed based on regular
610expressions from `change-log-version-number-regexp-list' which can be
611cutomized. Version numbers are only found in the first 10 percent of
612a file.
613
3476b54a
GM
614** Changes in Font Lock
615
616*** The new function `font-lock-remove-keywords' can be used to remove
617font-lock keywords from the current buffer or from a specific major
618mode.
619
b3b98592
GM
620** Comint (subshell) changes
621
66b6c480
MB
622By default, comint no longer uses the variable `comint-prompt-regexp' to
623distiguish prompts from user-input. Instead, it notices which parts of
624the text were output by the process, and which entered by the user, and
625attaches `field' properties to allow emacs commands to use this information.
626Common movement commands, notably beginning-of-line, respect field
627boundaries in a fairly natural manner.
628To disable this feature, and use the old behavior, set the variable
629`comint-use-prompt-regexp-instead-of-fields' to a non-nil value.
630
b3b98592
GM
631Comint now includes new features to send commands to running processes
632and redirect the output to a designated buffer or buffers.
633
634The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command reads a command and
635buffer name from the mini-buffer. The command is sent to the current
636buffer's process, and its output is inserted into the specified buffer.
637
638The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command-to-process acts like
639M-x comint-redirect-send-command but additionally reads the name of
640the buffer whose process should be used from the mini-buffer.
641
8c1bec7c
MB
642Packages based on comint.el like shell-mode, and scheme-interaction-mode
643now highlight user input and program prompts, and support choosing
644previous input with mouse-2. To control these feature, see the
645user-options `comint-highlight-input' and `comint-highlight-prompt'.
31fc5d15 646
e26cec67
GM
647** Changes to Rmail mode
648
c0510d27
GM
649*** The new user-option rmail-rmail-user-mail-address-regexp can be
650set to fine tune the identification of of the correspondent when
651receiving new mail. If it matches the address of the sender, the
652recipient is taken as correspondent of a mail. If nil, the default,
653`user-login-name' and `user-mail-address' are used to exclude yourself
654as correspondent.
655
656Usually you don't have to set this variable, except if you collect
657mails sent by you under different user names. Then it should be a
993d8b7d 658regexp matching your mail addresses.
c0510d27 659
3b55acc9
GM
660*** The new user-option rmail-confirm-expunge controls whether and how
661to ask for confirmation before expunging deleted messages from an
662Rmail file. You can choose between no confirmation, confirmation
663with y-or-n-p, or confirmation with yes-or-no-p. Default is to ask
664for confirmation with yes-or-no-p.
665
6a1950ec
GM
666*** RET is now bound in the Rmail summary to rmail-summary-goto-msg,
667like `j'.
668
5bb6f079
RS
669*** There is a new user option `rmail-digest-end-regexps' that
670specifies the regular expressions to detect the line that ends a
2d5e9b54 671digest message.
e26cec67 672
993d8b7d
DL
673*** The new user option `rmail-automatic-folder-directives' specifies
674in which folder to put messages automatically.
675
400a1ed0
GM
676** Changes to TeX mode
677
678The default mode has been changed from `plain-tex-mode' to
679`latex-mode'.
680
a933dad1
DL
681** Changes to RefTeX mode
682
683*** RefTeX has new support for index generation. Index entries can be
684 created with `C-c <', with completion available on index keys.
685 Pressing `C-c /' indexes the word at the cursor with a default
686 macro. `C-c >' compiles all index entries into an alphabetically
687 sorted *Index* buffer which looks like the final index. Entries
688 can be edited from that buffer.
689
690*** Label and citation key selection now allow to select several
691 items and reference them together (use `m' to mark items, `a' or
692 `A' to use all marked entries).
693
694*** reftex.el has been split into a number of smaller files to reduce
695 memory use when only a part of RefTeX is being used.
696
697*** a new command `reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex' (bound to `C-c &'
698 in BibTeX-mode) can be called in a BibTeX database buffer in order
699 to show locations in LaTeX documents where a particular entry has
700 been cited.
701
38de9631
GM
702** Emacs Lisp mode now allows multiple levels of outline headings.
703The level of a heading is determined from the number of leading
704semicolons in a heading line. Toplevel forms starting with a `('
705in column 1 are always made leaves.
706
a933dad1
DL
707** The M-x time-stamp command (most commonly used on write-file-hooks)
708has the following new features:
709
710*** The patterns for finding the time stamp and for updating a pattern
711may match text spanning multiple lines. For example, some people like
712to have the filename and date on separate lines. The new variable
713time-stamp-inserts-lines controls the matching for multi-line patterns.
714
715*** More than one time stamp can be updated in the same file. This
716feature is useful if you need separate time stamps in a program source
717file to both include in formatted documentation and insert in the
718compiled binary. The same time-stamp will be written at each matching
719pattern. The variable time-stamp-count enables this new feature; it
720defaults to 1.
721
5d94f558 722** Partial Completion mode now completes environment variables in
b675095c
GM
723file names.
724
a933dad1
DL
725** Tooltips.
726
727Tooltips are small X windows displaying a help string at the current
728mouse position. To use them, use the Lisp package `tooltip' which you
729can access via the user option `tooltip-mode'.
730
731Tooltips also provides support for GUD debugging. If activated,
732variable values can be displayed in tooltips by pointing at them with
733the mouse in source buffers. You can customize various aspects of the
734tooltip display in the group `tooltip'.
735
736** Customize changes
737
738*** Customize now supports comments about customized items. Use the
34f94cf9
DL
739`State' menu to add comments. Note that customization comments will
740cause the customizations to fail in earlier versions of Emacs.
a933dad1
DL
741
742*** The new option `custom-buffer-done-function' says whether to kill
743Custom buffers when you've done with them or just bury them (the
744default).
745
0ae51efb
GM
746*** The keyword :set-after in defcustom allows to specify dependencies
747between custom options. Example:
748
749 (defcustom default-input-method nil
750 "*Default input method for multilingual text (a string).
751 This is the input method activated automatically by the command
752 `toggle-input-method' (\\[toggle-input-method])."
753 :group 'mule
754 :type '(choice (const nil) string)
755 :set-after '(current-language-environment))
756
757This specifies that default-input-method should be set after
758current-language-environment even if default-input-method appears
759first in a custom-set-variables statement.
760
a933dad1
DL
761** New features in evaluation commands
762
5e03eb84 763*** The commands to evaluate Lisp expressions, such as C-M-x in Lisp
a933dad1
DL
764modes, C-j in Lisp Interaction mode, and M-:, now bind the variables
765print-level, print-length, and debug-on-error based on the
766customizable variables eval-expression-print-level,
767eval-expression-print-length, and eval-expression-debug-on-error.
768
5e03eb84
GM
769*** The function `eval-defun' (M-C-x) now loads Edebug and instruments
770code when called with a prefix argument.
771
ead53494
GM
772** Ispell changes
773
bbe15990
EZ
774*** The command `ispell' now spell-checks a region if
775transient-mark-mode is on, and the mark is active. Otherwise it
ead53494
GM
776spell-checks the current buffer.
777
a933dad1
DL
778** Dired changes
779
780*** New variable `dired-recursive-deletes' determines if the delete
781command will delete non-empty directories recursively. The default
782is, delete only empty directories.
783
784*** New variable `dired-recursive-copies' determines if the copy
785command will copy directories recursively. The default is, do not
786copy directories recursively.
787
f6737cde
GM
788*** In command `dired-do-shell-command' (usually bound to `!') a `?'
789in the shell command has a special meaning similar to `*', but with
790the difference that the command will be run on each file individually.
791
2f72fd2f
GM
792*** The new command `dired-find-alternate-file' (usually bound to `a')
793replaces the Dired buffer with the buffer for an alternate file or
794directory.
795
7381ae05
MB
796*** The new command `dired-show-file-type' (usually bound to `w') shows
797a message in the echo area describing what type of file the point is on.
798This command invokes the external program `file' do its work, and so
799will only work on systems with that program, and will be only as
800accurate or inaccurate as it is.
801
e024b101
GM
802*** Dired now properly handles undo changes of adding/removing `-R'
803from ls switches.
804
a933dad1
DL
805** The variable mail-specify-envelope-from controls whether to
806use the -f option when sending mail.
807
b1c609b1
GM
808** CC mode changes.
809
810Note: This release contains changes that might not be compatible with
811current user setups (although it's believed that these
812incompatibilities will only show in very uncommon circumstances).
813However, since the impact is uncertain, these changes may be rolled
814back depending on user feedback. Therefore there's no forward
815compatibility guarantee wrt the new features introduced in this
816release.
817
7972fcfc
GM
818*** c-style-variables-are-local-p now defaults to t.
819This is an incompatible change that has been made to make the behavior
820of the style system wrt global variable settings less confusing for
821non-advanced users. If you know what this variable does you might
822want to set it to nil in your .emacs, otherwise you probably don't
823have to bother.
824
825Defaulting c-style-variables-are-local-p to t avoids the confusing
826situation that occurs when a user sets some style variables globally
487522fe 827and edits both a Java and a non-Java file in the same Emacs session.
7972fcfc
GM
828If the style variables aren't buffer local in this case, loading of
829the second file will cause the default style (either "gnu" or "java"
830by default) to override the global settings made by the user.
831
b1c609b1
GM
832*** New initialization procedure for the style system.
833When the initial style for a buffer is determined by CC Mode (from the
834variable c-default-style), the global values of style variables now
835take precedence over the values specified by the chosen style. This
836is different than the old behavior: previously, the style-specific
837settings would override the global settings. This change makes it
838possible to do simple configuration in the intuitive way with
839Customize or with setq lines in one's .emacs file.
840
841By default, the global value of every style variable is the new
842special symbol set-from-style, which causes the value to be taken from
843the style system. This means that in effect, only an explicit setting
844of a style variable will cause the "overriding" behavior described
845above.
846
847Also note that global settings override style-specific settings *only*
848when the initial style of a buffer is chosen by a CC Mode major mode
849function. When a style is chosen in other ways --- for example, by a
850call like (c-set-style "gnu") in a hook, or via M-x c-set-style ---
851then the style-specific values take precedence over any global style
852values. In Lisp terms, global values override style-specific values
853only when the new second argument to c-set-style is non-nil; see the
854function documentation for more info.
855
856The purpose of these changes is to make it easier for users,
857especially novice users, to do simple customizations with Customize or
858with setq in their .emacs files. On the other hand, the new system is
859intended to be compatible with advanced users' customizations as well,
860such as those that choose styles in hooks or whatnot. This new system
861is believed to be almost entirely compatible with current
862configurations, in spite of the changed precedence between style and
863global variable settings when a buffer's default style is set.
864
865(Thanks to Eric Eide for clarifying this explanation a bit.)
866
867**** c-offsets-alist is now a customizable variable.
868This became possible as a result of the new initialization behavior.
869
870This variable is treated slightly differently from the other style
871variables; instead of using the symbol set-from-style, it will be
872completed with the syntactic symbols it doesn't already contain when
873the style is first initialized. This means it now defaults to the
874empty list to make all syntactic elements get their values from the
875style system.
876
877**** Compatibility variable to restore the old behavior.
878In case your configuration doesn't work with this change, you can set
879c-old-style-variable-behavior to non-nil to get the old behavior back
880as far as possible.
881
882*** Improvements to line breaking and text filling.
883CC Mode now handles this more intelligently and seamlessly wrt the
884surrounding code, especially inside comments. For details see the new
885chapter about this in the manual.
886
887**** New variable to recognize comment line prefix decorations.
888The variable c-comment-prefix-regexp has been added to properly
889recognize the line prefix in both block and line comments. It's
890primarily used to initialize the various paragraph recognition and
891adaptive filling variables that the text handling functions uses.
892
893**** New variable c-block-comment-prefix.
894This is a generalization of the now obsolete variable
895c-comment-continuation-stars to handle arbitrary strings.
896
897**** CC Mode now uses adaptive fill mode.
898This to make it adapt better to the paragraph style inside comments.
899
900It's also possible to use other adaptive filling packages inside CC
901Mode, notably Kyle E. Jones' Filladapt mode (http://wonderworks.com/).
902A new convenience function c-setup-filladapt sets up Filladapt for use
903inside CC Mode.
904
905Note though that the 2.12 version of Filladapt lacks a feature that
906causes it to work suboptimally when c-comment-prefix-regexp can match
907the empty string (which it commonly does). A patch for that is
908available from the CC Mode web site (http://www.python.org/emacs/
909cc-mode/).
910
911**** It's now possible to selectively turn off auto filling.
912The variable c-ignore-auto-fill is used to ignore auto fill mode in
913specific contexts, e.g. in preprocessor directives and in string
914literals.
915
916**** New context sensitive line break function c-context-line-break.
917It works like newline-and-indent in normal code, and adapts the line
918prefix according to the comment style when used inside comments. If
919you're normally using newline-and-indent, you might want to switch to
920this function.
921
922*** Fixes to IDL mode.
923It now does a better job in recognizing only the constructs relevant
924to IDL. E.g. it no longer matches "class" as the beginning of a
925struct block, but it does match the CORBA 2.3 "valuetype" keyword.
926Thanks to Eric Eide.
927
928*** Improvements to the Whitesmith style.
929It now keeps the style consistently on all levels and both when
930opening braces hangs and when they don't.
931
932**** New lineup function c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block.
933
934*** New lineup functions c-lineup-template-args and c-indent-multi-line-block.
935See their docstrings for details. c-lineup-template-args does a
936better job of tracking the brackets used as parens in C++ templates,
937and is used by default to line up continued template arguments.
938
939*** c-lineup-comment now preserves alignment with a comment on the
940previous line. It used to instead preserve comments that started in
941the column specified by comment-column.
942
943*** c-lineup-C-comments handles "free form" text comments.
944In comments with a long delimiter line at the start, the indentation
945is kept unchanged for lines that start with an empty comment line
946prefix. This is intended for the type of large block comments that
947contain documentation with its own formatting. In these you normally
948don't want CC Mode to change the indentation.
949
950*** The `c' syntactic symbol is now relative to the comment start
951instead of the previous line, to make integers usable as lineup
952arguments.
953
954*** All lineup functions have gotten docstrings.
955
956*** More preprocessor directive movement functions.
957c-down-conditional does the reverse of c-up-conditional.
958c-up-conditional-with-else and c-down-conditional-with-else are
959variants of these that also stops at "#else" lines (suggested by Don
960Provan).
961
962*** Minor improvements to many movement functions in tricky situations.
963
c407c570
GM
964** Makefile mode changes
965
966*** The mode now uses the abbrev table `makefile-mode-abbrev-table'.
967
5d94f558 968*** Conditionals and include statements are now highlighted when
c407c570
GM
969Fontlock mode is active.
970
87be76f6
GM
971** Isearch changes
972
3353ef5a
GM
973*** Isearch now puts a call to `isearch-resume' in the command history,
974so that searches can be resumed.
975
976*** In Isearch mode, M-C-s and M-C-r are now bound like C-s and C-r,
c407c570
GM
977respectively, i.e. you can repeat a regexp isearch with the same keys
978that started the search.
979
87be76f6 980*** In Isearch mode, mouse-2 in the echo area now yanks the current
a933dad1
DL
981selection into the search string rather than giving an error.
982
87be76f6
GM
983*** There is a new lazy highlighting feature in incremental search.
984
d35fce81 985Lazy highlighting is switched on/off by customizing variable
87be76f6
GM
986`isearch-lazy-highlight'. When active, all matches for the current
987search string are highlighted. The current match is highlighted as
988before using face `isearch' or `region'. All other matches are
989highlighted using face `isearch-lazy-highlight-face' which defaults to
5d94f558 990`secondary-selection'.
87be76f6
GM
991
992The extra highlighting makes it easier to anticipate where the cursor
993will end up each time you press C-s or C-r to repeat a pending search.
994Highlighting of these additional matches happens in a deferred fashion
995using "idle timers," so the cycles needed do not rob isearch of its
996usual snappy response.
997
998If `isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup' is set to t, highlights for
999matches are automatically cleared when you end the search. If it is
1000set to nil, you can remove the highlights manually with `M-x
1001isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup'.
1002
35384f06
GM
1003** Changes in sort.el
1004
1005The function sort-numeric-fields interprets numbers starting with `0'
12c25bdc 1006as octal and numbers starting with `0x' or `0X' as hexadecimal. The
35384f06
GM
1007new user-option sort-numberic-base can be used to specify a default
1008numeric base.
87be76f6 1009
d7b511c4
GM
1010** Changes to Ange-ftp
1011
1012*** Ange-ftp allows you to specify of a port number in remote file
d67f47e4
DL
1013names cleanly. It is appended to the host name, separated by a hash
1014sign, e.g. `/foo@bar.org#666:mumble'. (This syntax comes from EFS.)
1015
d7b511c4
GM
1016*** If the new user-option `ange-ftp-try-passive-mode' is set, passive
1017ftp mode will be used if the ftp client supports that.
1018
9d453139
SS
1019*** Ange-ftp handles the output of the w32-style clients which
1020output ^M at the end of lines.
1021
4b9347b3
GM
1022** Shell script mode changes.
1023
1024Shell script mode (sh-script) can now indent scripts for shells
1025derived from sh and rc. The indentation style is customizeable, and
1026sh-script can attempt to "learn" the current buffer's style.
1027
79214ddf
FP
1028** Etags changes.
1029
1030*** In DOS, etags looks for file.cgz if it cannot find file.c.
1031
aca0be23 1032*** New option --ignore-case-regex is an alternative to --regex. It is now
8dc78b52
FP
1033possible to bind a regexp to a language, by prepending the regexp with
1034{lang}, where lang is one of the languages that `etags --help' prints out.
1035This feature is useful especially for regex files, where each line contains
1036a regular expression. The manual contains details.
aca0be23 1037
79214ddf
FP
1038*** In C and derived languages, etags creates tags for function
1039declarations when given the --declarations option.
1040
1041*** In C++, tags are created for "operator". The tags have the form
aca0be23 1042"operator+", without spaces between the keyword and the operator.
79214ddf
FP
1043
1044*** New language Ada: tags are functions, procedures, packages, tasks, and
1045types.
1046
de370c4c 1047*** In Fortran, `procedure' is not tagged.
79214ddf
FP
1048
1049*** In Java, tags are created for "interface".
1050
1051*** In Lisp, "(defstruct (foo", "(defun (operator" and similar constructs
1052are now tagged.
1053
1054*** In Perl, the --globals option tags global variables. my and local
1055variables are tagged.
1056
1057*** New language Python: def and class at the beginning of a line are tags.
1058
8dc78b52
FP
1059*** .ss files are Scheme files, .pdb is Postscript with C syntax, .psw is
1060for PSWrap.
79214ddf 1061
f6737cde
GM
1062** Changes in etags.el
1063
3f6e4b8b
GM
1064*** The new user-option tags-case-fold-search can be used to make
1065tags operations case-sensitive or case-insensitive. The default
1066is to use the same setting as case-fold-search.
1067
f6737cde
GM
1068*** You can display additional output with M-x tags-apropos by setting
1069the new variable tags-apropos-additional-actions.
1070
1071If non-nil, the variable's value should be a list of triples (TITLE
1072FUNCTION TO-SEARCH). For each triple, M-x tags-apropos processes
1073TO-SEARCH and lists tags from it. TO-SEARCH should be an alist,
1074obarray, or symbol. If it is a symbol, the symbol's value is used.
1075
1076TITLE is a string to use to label the list of tags from TO-SEARCH.
1077
1078FUNCTION is a function to call when an entry is selected in the Tags
1079List buffer. It is called with one argument, the selected symbol.
1080
1081A useful example value for this variable might be something like:
1082
1083 '(("Emacs Lisp" Info-goto-emacs-command-node obarray)
1084 ("Common Lisp" common-lisp-hyperspec common-lisp-hyperspec-obarray)
1085 ("SCWM" scwm-documentation scwm-obarray))
1086
1087*** The face tags-tag-face can be used to customize the appearance
1088of tags in the output of M-x tags-apropos.
1089
1090*** Setting tags-apropos-verbose to a non-nil value displays the
1091names of tags files in the *Tags List* buffer.
1092
fbc164de
PE
1093** Emacs now attempts to determine the initial language environment
1094and preferred and locale coding systems systematically from the
1095LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG environment variables during startup.
1096
0b8a3a6d
DL
1097** New language environments `Polish', `Latin-8' and `Latin-9'.
1098Latin-8 and Latin-9 correspond respectively to the ISO character sets
10998859-14 (Celtic) and 8859-15 (updated Latin-1, with the Euro sign).
1100There is currently no specific input method support for them.
59c1bf85 1101
163ea954 1102** Fortran mode has a new command `fortran-strip-sequence-nos' to
e33b0397
DL
1103remove text past column 72. The syntax class of `\' in Fortran is now
1104appropriate for C-style escape sequences in strings.
1105
1106** SGML mode's default `sgml-validate-command' is now `nsgmls'.
1107
6f8ea2ae
DL
1108** A new command `view-emacs-problems' (C-h P) displays the PROBLEMS file.
1109
c0510d27
GM
1110** The Dabbrev package has a new user-option `dabbrev-ignore-regexps'
1111containing a list of regular expressions. Buffers matching a regular
1112expression from that list, are not checked.
1113
5d94f558
SS
1114** Emacs can now figure out modification times of remote files.
1115When you do C-x C-f /user@host:/path/file RET and edit the file,
1116and someone else modifies the file, you will be prompted to revert
1117the buffer, just like for the local files.
1118
dc28878c
GM
1119** The buffer menu (C-x C-b) no longer lists the *Buffer List* buffer.
1120
a933dad1
DL
1121** New modes and packages
1122
90cbf47e
GM
1123*** The new package timeclock.el is a mode is for keeping track of time
1124intervals. You can use it for whatever purpose you like, but the
1125typical scenario is to keep track of how much time you spend working
1126on certain projects.
1127
1128*** The new package hi-lock.el, text matching interactively entered
d96d6bb0 1129regexp's can be highlighted. For example,
abb2db1c 1130
d96d6bb0 1131 M-x highlight-regexp RET clearly RET RET
abb2db1c
GM
1132
1133will highlight all occurrences of `clearly' using a yellow background
1134face. New occurrences of `clearly' will be highlighted as they are
1135typed. `M-x unhighlight-regexp RET' will remove the highlighting.
1136Any existing face can be used for highlighting and a set of
1137appropriate faces is provided. The regexps can be written into the
1138current buffer in a form that will be recognized the next time the
1139corresponding file is read.
1140
d96d6bb0 1141*** The new package zone.el plays games with Emacs' display when
abb2db1c
GM
1142Emacs is idle.
1143
31fc5d15
GM
1144*** The new package xml.el provides a simple but generic XML
1145parser. It doesn't parse the DTDs however.
1146
5cb6a58e
SM
1147*** The comment operations are now provided by the newcomment.el
1148package which allows different styles of comment-region and should
1149be more robust while offering the same functionality.
1150
578979ee
GM
1151*** The Ebrowse package implements a C++ class browser and tags
1152facilities tailored for use with C++. It is documented in a
1153separate Texinfo file.
1154
dc1178bf
SM
1155*** The PCL-CVS package available by either running M-x cvs-examine
1156or by visiting a CVS administrative directory (with a prefix argument)
1157provides an alternative interface to VC-dired for CVS.
1158It comes with log-view-mode to view RCS and SCCS logs and log-edit-mode
1159used to enter checkin log messages.
1160
6abca616
EZ
1161*** The new package called `woman' allows to browse Unix man pages
1162without invoking external programs.
1163
1164The command `M-x woman' formats manual pages entirely in Emacs Lisp
1165and then displays them, like `M-x manual-entry' does. Unlike
1166`manual-entry', `woman' does not invoke any external programs, so it
1167is useful on systems such as MS-DOS/MS-Windows where the `man' and
490f2e7b 1168Groff or `troff' commands are not readily available.
6abca616
EZ
1169
1170The command `M-x woman-find-file' asks for the file name of a man
1171page, then formats and displays it like `M-x woman' does.
1172
5e5dff44
GM
1173*** The new command M-x re-builder offers a convenient interface for
1174authoring regular expressions with immediate visual feedback.
1175
1176The buffer from which the command was called becomes the target for
1177the regexp editor popping up in a separate window. Matching text in
1178the target buffer is immediately color marked during the editing.
1179Each sub-expression of the regexp will show up in a different face so
1180even complex regexps can be edited and verified on target data in a
1181single step.
1182
1183On displays not supporting faces the matches instead blink like
1184matching parens to make them stand out. On such a setup you will
1185probably also want to use the sub-expression mode when the regexp
1186contains such to get feedback about their respective limits.
1187
f7136ee8
GM
1188*** glasses-mode is a minor mode that makes
1189unreadableIdentifiersLikeThis readable. It works as glasses, without
1190actually modifying content of a buffer.
1191
bbd9b566
GM
1192*** The package ebnf2ps translates an EBNF to a syntactic chart in
1193PostScript.
1194
1195Currently accepts ad-hoc EBNF, ISO EBNF and Bison/Yacc.
1196
1197The ad-hoc default EBNF syntax has the following elements:
1198
1199 ; comment (until end of line)
1200 A non-terminal
1201 "C" terminal
1202 ?C? special
1203 $A default non-terminal
1204 $"C" default terminal
1205 $?C? default special
1206 A = B. production (A is the header and B the body)
1207 C D sequence (C occurs before D)
1208 C | D alternative (C or D occurs)
1209 A - B exception (A excluding B, B without any non-terminal)
1210 n * A repetition (A repeats n (integer) times)
1211 (C) group (expression C is grouped together)
1212 [C] optional (C may or not occurs)
1213 C+ one or more occurrences of C
1214 {C}+ one or more occurrences of C
1215 {C}* zero or more occurrences of C
1216 {C} zero or more occurrences of C
1217 C / D equivalent to: C {D C}*
1218 {C || D}+ equivalent to: C {D C}*
1219 {C || D}* equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1220 {C || D} equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1221
1222Please, see ebnf2ps documentation for EBNF syntax and how to use it.
1223
99453a38
GM
1224*** The package align.el will align columns within a region, using M-x
1225align. Its mode-specific rules, based on regular expressions,
1226determine where the columns should be split. In C and C++, for
1227example, it will align variable names in declaration lists, or the
1228equal signs of assignments.
1229
559cee90
DL
1230*** `paragraph-indent-minor-mode' is a new minor mode supporting
1231paragraphs in the same style as `paragraph-indent-text-mode'.
1232
6448a6b3
GM
1233*** bs.el is a new package for buffer selection similar to
1234list-buffers or electric-buffer-list. Use M-x bs-show to display a
1235buffer menu with this package. You can use M-x bs-customize to
1236customize the package.
1237
6344985d
GM
1238*** find-lisp.el is a package emulating the Unix find command in Lisp.
1239
249652b1
GM
1240*** calculator.el is a small calculator package that is intended to
1241replace desktop calculators such as xcalc and calc.exe. Actually, it
1242is not too small - it has more features than most desktop calculators,
1243and can be customized easily to get many more functions. It should
1244not be confused with "calc" which is a much bigger mathematical tool
1245which answers different needs.
1246
3476b54a
GM
1247*** The minor modes cwarn-mode and global-cwarn-mode highlights
1248suspicious C and C++ constructions. Currently, assignments inside
1249expressions, semicolon following `if', `for' and `while' (except, of
1250course, after a `do .. while' statement), and C++ functions with
1251reference parameters are recognized. The modes require font-lock mode
1252to be enabled.
1253
8964fec7
SM
1254*** smerge-mode.el provides `smerge-mode', a simple minor-mode for files
1255containing diff3-style conflict markers, such as generated by RCS.
1256
a933dad1
DL
1257*** 5x5.el is a simple puzzle game.
1258
1259*** hl-line.el provides a minor mode to highlight the current line.
1260
1261*** ansi-color.el translates ANSI terminal escapes into text-properties.
1262
1263*** delphi.el provides a major mode for editing the Delphi (Object
1264Pascal) language.
1265
1266*** quickurl.el provides a simple method of inserting a URL based on
1267the text at point.
1268
1269*** sql.el provides an interface to SQL data bases.
1270
8d54eb69
DL
1271*** fortune.el uses the fortune program to create mail/news signatures.
1272
a933dad1
DL
1273*** whitespace.el ???
1274
ebcfda83
GM
1275*** PostScript mode (ps-mode) is a new major mode for editing PostScript
1276files. It offers: interaction with a PostScript interpreter, including
1277(very basic) error handling; fontification, easily customizable for
1278interpreter messages; auto-indentation; insertion of EPSF templates and
1279often used code snippets; viewing of BoundingBox; commenting out /
1280uncommenting regions; conversion of 8bit characters to PostScript octal
1281codes. All functionality is accessible through a menu.
1282
1283*** delim-col helps to prettify columns in a text region or rectangle.
1284
1285Here is an example of columns:
1286
1287horse apple bus
1288dog pineapple car EXTRA
1289porcupine strawberry airplane
1290
1291Doing the following settings:
1292
1293 (setq delimit-columns-str-before "[ ")
1294 (setq delimit-columns-str-after " ]")
1295 (setq delimit-columns-str-separator ", ")
1296 (setq delimit-columns-separator "\t")
1297
1298
1299Selecting the lines above and typing:
1300
1301 M-x delimit-columns-region
1302
1303It results:
1304
1305[ horse , apple , bus , ]
1306[ dog , pineapple , car , EXTRA ]
1307[ porcupine, strawberry, airplane, ]
1308
1309delim-col has the following options:
1310
1311 delimit-columns-str-before Specify a string to be inserted
1312 before all columns.
1313
1314 delimit-columns-str-separator Specify a string to be inserted
1315 between each column.
1316
1317 delimit-columns-str-after Specify a string to be inserted
1318 after all columns.
1319
1320 delimit-columns-separator Specify a regexp which separates
1321 each column.
1322
1323delim-col has the following commands:
1324
1325 delimit-columns-region Prettify all columns in a text region.
1326 delimit-columns-rectangle Prettify all columns in a text rectangle.
1327
f507826c 1328*** The package recentf.el maintains a menu for visiting files that
31fc5d15
GM
1329were operated on recently.
1330
1331M-x recentf-mode RET toggles recentf mode.
f507826c 1332
31fc5d15
GM
1333M-x customize-variable RET recentf-mode RET can be used to enable
1334recentf at Emacs startup.
f507826c 1335
31fc5d15
GM
1336M-x customize-variable RET recentf-menu-filter RET to specify a menu
1337filter function to change the menu appearance. For example, the recent
1338file list can be displayed:
f507826c 1339
31fc5d15
GM
1340- organized by major modes, directories or user defined rules.
1341- sorted by file pathes, file names, ascending or descending.
1342- showing pathes relative to the current default-directory
f507826c 1343
31fc5d15
GM
1344The `recentf-filter-changer' menu filter function allows to
1345dynamically change the menu appearance.
f507826c 1346
8062f458
DL
1347*** elide-head.el provides a mechanism for eliding boilerplate header
1348text.
1349
36e24b82 1350*** footnote.el provides `footnote-mode', a minor mode supporting use
91735437
DL
1351of footnotes. It is intended for use with Message mode, but isn't
1352specific to Message mode.
1353
36e24b82
DL
1354*** diff-mode.el provides `diff-mode', a major mode for
1355viewing/editing context diffs (patches). It is selected for files
1356with extension `.diff', `.diffs', `.patch' and `.rej'.
1357
aaa659ef
DL
1358*** EUDC, the Emacs Unified Directory Client, provides a common user
1359interface to access directory servers using different directory
1360protocols. It has a separate manual.
1361
eee54b0e
DL
1362*** autoconf.el provides a major mode for editing configure.in files
1363for Autoconf, selected automatically.
1364
612839b6
GM
1365*** windmove.el provides moving between windows.
1366
5d94f558 1367*** crm.el provides a facility to read multiple strings from the
612839b6 1368minibuffer with completion.
aaa659ef 1369
399da7e3
DL
1370*** todo-mode.el provides management of TODO lists and integration
1371with the diary features.
1372
6e417ca5
DL
1373*** autoarg.el provides a feature reported from Twenex Emacs whereby
1374numeric keys supply prefix args rather than self inserting.
1375
4a27bdfb
GM
1376*** The function `turn-off-auto-fill' unconditionally turns off Auto
1377Fill mode.
1378
a933dad1
DL
1379** Withdrawn packages
1380
1381*** mldrag.el has been removed. mouse.el provides the same
1382functionality with aliases for the mldrag functions.
25a81338 1383
3261c1d8
DL
1384*** eval-reg.el has been obsoleted by changes to edebug.el and removed.
1385
1386*** ph.el has been obsoleted by EUDC and removed.
ce75fd23
GM
1387
1388\f
1389* Lisp changes made after edition 2.6 of the Emacs Lisp Manual,
1390(Display-related features are described in a page of their own below.)
1391
ead53494
GM
1392** If `display-buffer-reuse-frames' is set, function `display-buffer'
1393will raise frames displaying a buffer, instead of creating a new
1394frame or window.
1395
27848c01
GM
1396** Two new functions for removing elements from lists/sequences
1397were added
1398
1399- Function: remove ELT SEQ
1400
1401Return a copy of SEQ with all occurences of ELT removed. SEQ must be
1402a list, vector, or string. The comparison is done with `equal'.
1403
1404- Function: remq ELT LIST
1405
1406Return a copy of LIST with all occurences of ELT removed. The
1407comparison is done with `eq'.
1408
1409** The function `delete' now also works with vectors and strings.
3ab82477 1410
b548072f
GM
1411** The meaning of the `:weakness WEAK' argument of make-hash-table
1412has been changed.
1413
07b14857
KH
1414** Function `aset' stores any multibyte character in any string
1415without signaling "Attempt to change char length of a string". It may
1416convert a unibyte string to multibyte if necessary.
1417
9662da0b
GM
1418** The value of the `help-echo' text property is called as a function
1419or evaluated, if it is not a string already, to obtain a help string.
d5aa31d8 1420
7fce7efb
DL
1421** Function `make-obsolete' now has an optional arg to say when the
1422function was declared obsolete.
1423
5d94f558 1424** Function `plist-member' is renamed from `widget-plist-member' (which is
7fce7efb
DL
1425retained as an alias).
1426
f98d3086
SM
1427** Easy-menu's :filter now works as in XEmacs.
1428It takes the unconverted (i.e. XEmacs) form of the menu and the result
1429is automatically converted to Emacs' form.
1430
87efd256
GM
1431** The new function `window-list' has been defined
1432
1433- Function: window-list &optional WINDOW MINIBUF ALL-FRAMES
1434
1435Return a list of windows in canonical order. The parameters WINDOW,
1436MINIBUF and ALL-FRAMES are defined like for `next-window'.
1437
67c9a1d2
GM
1438** There's a new function `some-window' defined as follows
1439
1440- Function: some-window PREDICATE &optional MINIBUF ALL-FRAMES DEFAULT
1441
1442Return a window satisfying PREDICATE.
1443
1444This function cycles through all visible windows using `walk-windows',
1445calling PREDICATE on each one. PREDICATE is called with a window as
1446argument. The first window for which PREDICATE returns a non-nil
1447value is returned. If no window satisfies PREDICATE, DEFAULT is
1448returned.
1449
1450Optional second arg MINIBUF t means count the minibuffer window even
1451if not active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means count the minibuffer iff
1452it is active. MINIBUF neither t nor nil means not to count the
1453minibuffer even if it is active.
1454
1455Several frames may share a single minibuffer; if the minibuffer
1456counts, all windows on all frames that share that minibuffer count
1457too. Therefore, if you are using a separate minibuffer frame
1458and the minibuffer is active and MINIBUF says it counts,
1459`walk-windows' includes the windows in the frame from which you
1460entered the minibuffer, as well as the minibuffer window.
1461
1462ALL-FRAMES is the optional third argument.
1463ALL-FRAMES nil or omitted means cycle within the frames as specified above.
1464ALL-FRAMES = `visible' means include windows on all visible frames.
1465ALL-FRAMES = 0 means include windows on all visible and iconified frames.
1466ALL-FRAMES = t means include windows on all frames including invisible frames.
1467If ALL-FRAMES is a frame, it means include windows on that frame.
1468Anything else means restrict to the selected frame.
1469
ead53494
GM
1470** The function `single-key-description' now encloses function key and
1471event names in angle brackets. When called with a second optional
1472argument non-nil, angle brackets won't be printed.
dce6b995 1473
25fa6deb
GM
1474** If the variable `message-truncate-lines' is bound to t around a
1475call to `message', the echo area will not be resized to display that
088831a6
GM
1476message; it will be truncated instead, as it was done in 20.x.
1477Default value is nil.
25fa6deb 1478
5d94f558 1479** The user option `line-number-display-limit' can now be set to nil,
1681ead6
GM
1480meaning no limit.
1481
5d94f558 1482** `select-safe-coding-system' now also checks the most preferred
c08398de
DL
1483coding-system if buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and
1484DEFAULT-CODING-SYSTEM is not specified,
1485
80c05bd3 1486** The function `subr-arity' provides information on the argument list
de370c4c
DL
1487of a primitive.
1488
80c05bd3
DL
1489** The text property `keymap' specifies a key map which overrides the
1490buffer's local map and the map specified by the `local-map' property.
1491This is probably what most current uses of `local-map' want, rather
1492than replacing the local map.
1493
4bc7a543
DL
1494** The obsolete variables before-change-function and
1495after-change-function are no longer acted upon and have been removed.
45f485a6
GM
1496
1497** The function `apropos-mode' runs the hook `apropos-mode-hook'.
1498
f0298744
DL
1499** `concat' no longer accepts individual integer arguments, as
1500promised long ago.
1501
5d94f558 1502** The new function `float-time' returns the current time as a float.
a933dad1
DL
1503\f
1504* Lisp changes in Emacs 21.1 (see following page for display-related features)
1505
1506Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
1507--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
1508When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
1509so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
1510
0b8a3a6d
DL
1511*** The functions `find-charset-region' and `find-charset-string' include
1512`eight-bit-control' and/or `eight-bit-graphic' in the returned list
1513when it finds 8-bit characters. Previously, it included `ascii' in a
1514multibyte buffer and `unknown' in a unibyte buffer.
1515
1516*** The functions `set-buffer-modified', `string-as-multibyte' and
1517`string-as-unibyte' change the byte sequence of a buffer if it
1518contains a character from the `eight-bit-control' character set.
1519
1520*** The handling of multibyte sequences in a multibyte buffer is
1521changed. Previously, a byte sequence matching the pattern
1522[\200-\237][\240-\377]+ was interpreted as a single character
1523regardless of the length of the trailing bytes [\240-\377]+. Thus, if
1524the sequence was longer than what the leading byte indicated, the
1525extra trailing bytes were ignored by Lisp functions. Now such extra
1526bytes are independent 8-bit characters belonging to the charset
1527eight-bit-graphic.
1528
1529** Fontsets are now implemented using char-tables.
1530
1531A fontset can now be specified for for each independent character, for
1532a group of characters or for a character set rather than just for a
1533character set as previously.
1534
1535*** The arguments of the function `set-fontset-font' are changed.
1536They are NAME, CHARACTER, FONTNAME, and optional FRAME. The function
1537modifies fontset NAME to use FONTNAME for CHARACTER.
1538
1539CHARACTER may be a cons (FROM . TO), where FROM and TO are non-generic
1540characters. In that case FONTNAME is used for all characters in the
1541range FROM and TO (inclusive). CHARACTER may be a charset. In that
1542case FONTNAME is used for all character in the charset.
1543
1544FONTNAME may be a cons (FAMILY . REGISTRY), where FAMILY is the family
1545name of a font and REGSITRY is a registry name of a font.
1546
1547*** Variable x-charset-registry has been deleted. The default charset
1548registries of character sets are set in the default fontset
1549"fontset-default".
1550
1551*** The function `create-fontset-from-fontset-spec' ignores the second
1552argument STYLE-VARIANT. It never creates style-variant fontsets.
1553
1554** The method of composing characters is changed. Now character
1555composition is done by a special text property `composition' in
1556buffers and strings.
1557
1558*** Charset composition is deleted. Emacs never creates a `composite
1559character' which is an independent character with a unique character
1560code. Thus the following functions handling `composite characters'
1561have been deleted: composite-char-component,
1562composite-char-component-count, composite-char-composition-rule,
1563composite-char-composition-rule and decompose-composite-char delete.
1564The variables leading-code-composition and min-composite-char have
1565also been deleted.
1566
1567*** Three more glyph reference points are added. They can be used to
1568specify a composition rule. See the documentation of the variable
1569`reference-point-alist' for more detail.
1570
1571*** The function `compose-region' takes new arguments COMPONENTS and
1572MODIFICATION-FUNC. With COMPONENTS, you can specify not only a
1573composition rule but also characters to be composed. Such characters
1574may differ between buffer and string text.
1575
1576*** The function `compose-string' takes new arguments START, END,
1577COMPONENTS, and MODIFICATION-FUNC.
1578
1579*** The function `compose-string' puts text property `composition'
1580directly on the argument STRING instead of returning a new string.
1581Likewise, the function `decompose-string' just removes text property
1582`composition' from STRING.
1583
1584*** The new function `find-composition' returns information about
1585a composition at a specified position in a buffer or a string.
1586
1587*** The function `decompose-composite-char' is now labeled as
1588obsolete.
1589
1590** The new character set `mule-unicode-0100-24ff' is introduced for
1591Unicode characters of the range U+0100..U+24FF. Currently, this
1592character set is not used.
1593
1594** The new character sets `japanese-jisx0213-1' and
1595`japanese-jisx0213-2' are introduced for the new Japanese standard JIS
1596X 0213 Plane 1 and Plane 2.
1597
1598+++
1599** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic'
1600are introduced for 8-bit characters in the ranges 0x80..0x9F and
f98d3086 16010xA0..0xFF respectively.
0b8a3a6d 1602
399da7e3 1603+++
f0124b4a
DL
1604** If the APPEND argument of `write-region' is an integer, it seeks to
1605that offset in the file before writing.
1606
f98d3086
SM
1607** The function `add-minor-mode' has been added for convenience and
1608compatibility with XEmacs (and is used internally by define-minor-mode).
7464346d 1609
612839b6
GM
1610** The function `shell-command' now sets the default directory of the
1611`*Shell Command Output*' buffer to the default directory of the buffer
1612from which the command was issued.
1613
1614** The functions `query-replace', `query-replace-regexp',
1615`query-replace-regexp-eval' `map-query-replace-regexp',
1616`replace-string', `replace-regexp', and `perform-replace' take two
1617additional optional arguments START and END that specify the region to
1618operate on.
1619
271b4185
GM
1620** The new function `count-screen-lines' is a more flexible alternative
1621to `window-buffer-height'.
1622
1623- Function: count-screen-lines &optional BEG END COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE WINDOW
1624
1625Return the number of screen lines in the region between BEG and END.
1626The number of screen lines may be different from the number of actual
1627lines, due to line breaking, display table, etc.
1628
1629Optional arguments BEG and END default to `point-min' and `point-max'
1630respectively.
1631
1632If region ends with a newline, ignore it unless optinal third argument
1633COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE is non-nil.
1634
1635The optional fourth argument WINDOW specifies the window used for
1636obtaining parameters such as width, horizontal scrolling, and so
1637on. The default is to use the selected window's parameters.
1638
1639Like `vertical-motion', `count-screen-lines' always uses the current
1640buffer, regardless of which buffer is displayed in WINDOW. This makes
1641possible to use `count-screen-lines' in any buffer, whether or not it
1642is currently displayed in some window.
1643
3c30cb6e
DL
1644** The new function `mapc' is like `mapcar' but doesn't collect the
1645argument function's results.
1646
62f20204
GM
1647** The functions base64-decode-region and base64-decode-string now
1648signal an error instead of returning nil if decoding fails.
1649
c0510d27
GM
1650** The function sendmail-user-agent-compose now recognizes a `body'
1651header is the list of headers passed to it.
1652
1653** The new function member-ignore-case works like `member', but
1654ignores differences in case and text representation.
1655
1656** The buffer-local variable cursor-type can be used to specify the
19d1bc27
GM
1657cursor to use in windows displaying a buffer. Values are interpreted
1658as follows:
1659
1660 t use the cursor specified for the frame (default)
1661 nil don't display a cursor
1662 `bar' display a bar cursor with default width
1663 (bar . WIDTH) display a bar cursor with width WIDTH
1664 others display a box cursor.
1665
9a0dd3dc
GM
1666** The variable open-paren-in-column-0-is-defun-start controls whether
1667an open parenthesis in column 0 is considered to be the start of a
1668defun. If set, the default, it is considered a defun start. If not
1669set, an open parenthesis in column 0 has no special meaning.
1670
d7b511c4 1671** The new function `string-to-syntax' can be used to translate syntax
dc1178bf 1672specifications in string form as accepted by `modify-syntax-entry' to
d7b511c4
GM
1673the cons-cell form that is used for the values of the `syntax-table'
1674text property, and in `font-lock-syntactic-keywords'.
1675
1676Example:
1677
1678 (string-to-syntax "()")
1679 => (4 . 41)
1680
1fa28578
GM
1681** Emacs' reader supports CL read syntax for integers in bases
1682other than 10.
1683
1684*** `#BINTEGER' or `#bINTEGER' reads INTEGER in binary (radix 2).
1685INTEGER optionally contains a sign.
1686
5d94f558 1687 #b1111
1fa28578 1688 => 15
5d94f558 1689 #b-1111
1fa28578
GM
1690 => -15
1691
1692*** `#OINTEGER' or `#oINTEGER' reads INTEGER in octal (radix 8).
1693
5d94f558 1694 #o666
1fa28578
GM
1695 => 438
1696
1697*** `#XINTEGER' or `#xINTEGER' reads INTEGER in hexadecimal (radix 16).
1698
5d94f558 1699 #xbeef
1fa28578
GM
1700 => 48815
1701
1702*** `#RADIXrINTEGER' reads INTEGER in radix RADIX, 2 <= RADIX <= 36.
1703
5d94f558 1704 #2R-111
1fa28578 1705 => -7
5d94f558 1706 #25rah
1fa28578
GM
1707 => 267
1708
3d4ff2dd 1709** The function `documentation-property' now evaluates the value of
f98d3086 1710the given property to obtain a string if it doesn't refer to etc/DOC
e9b4e5ff
GM
1711and isn't a string.
1712
3d4ff2dd
GM
1713** If called for a symbol, the function `documentation' now looks for
1714a `function-documentation' property of that symbol. If it has a non-nil
1715value, the documentation is taken from that value. If the value is
1716not a string, it is evaluated to obtain a string.
1717
16ce590d
DL
1718+++
1719** The last argument of `define-key-after' defaults to t for convenience.
1720
73825616 1721** The new function `replace-regexp-in-string' replaces all matches
16ce590d
DL
1722for a regexp in a string.
1723
1724** `mouse-position' now runs the abnormal hook
1725`mouse-position-function'.
1726
723e779c
GM
1727** The function string-to-number now returns a float for numbers
1728that don't fit into a Lisp integer.
1729
d1e103b2
GM
1730** The variable keyword-symbols-constants-flag has been removed.
1731Keywords are now always considered constants.
1732
31047e0d
DL
1733+++
1734** The new function `delete-and-extract-region' deletes text and
1735returns it.
1736
7a85e4df
GM
1737** The function `clear-this-command-keys' now also clears the vector
1738returned by function `recent-keys'.
1739
02b14400
RS
1740+++
1741** Variables `beginning-of-defun-function' and `end-of-defun-function'
1742can be used to define handlers for the functions that find defuns.
1743Major modes can define these locally instead of rebinding M-C-a
1744etc. if the normal conventions for defuns are not appropriate for the
1745mode.
404fa7d6 1746
02b14400 1747+++
8964fec7
SM
1748** easy-mmode-define-minor-mode now takes an additional BODY argument
1749and is renamed `define-minor-mode'.
1750
02b14400
RS
1751+++
1752** If an abbrev has a hook function which is a symbol, and that symbol
1753has a non-nil `no-self-insert' property, the return value of the hook
1754function specifies whether an expansion has been done or not. If it
1755returns nil, abbrev-expand also returns nil, meaning "no expansion has
1756been performed."
1757
1758When abbrev expansion is done by typing a self-inserting character,
1759and the abbrev has a hook with the `no-self-insert' property, and the
1760hook function returns non-nil meaning expansion has been done,
1761then the self-inserting character is not inserted.
ef961722 1762
02b14400 1763+++
81da8b32
GM
1764** The function `intern-soft' now accepts a symbol as first argument.
1765In this case, that exact symbol is looked up in the specified obarray,
1766and the function's value is nil if it is not found.
1767
02b14400 1768+++
9e207b90
GM
1769** The new macro `with-syntax-table' can be used to evaluate forms
1770with the syntax table of the current buffer temporarily set to a
1771specified table.
1772
1773 (with-syntax-table TABLE &rest BODY)
1774
1775Evaluate BODY with syntax table of current buffer set to a copy of
03d9c64c
GM
1776TABLE. The current syntax table is saved, BODY is evaluated, and the
1777saved table is restored, even in case of an abnormal exit. Value is
1778what BODY returns.
9e207b90 1779
02b14400 1780+++
d7f89643 1781** Regular expressions now support intervals \{n,m\} as well as
95cd4c40 1782Perl's shy-groups \(?:...\) and non-greedy *? +? and ?? operators.
8964fec7 1783
02b14400 1784+++
dde9e75a
GM
1785** The optional argument BUFFER of function file-local-copy has been
1786removed since it wasn't used by anything.
1787
02b14400 1788+++
9da30515
GM
1789** The file name argument of function `file-locked-p' is now required
1790instead of being optional.
1791
02b14400 1792+++
d20679eb
GM
1793** The new built-in error `text-read-only' is signaled when trying to
1794modify read-only text.
1795
02b14400 1796+++
fbc164de
PE
1797** New functions and variables for locales.
1798
1799The new variable `locale-coding-system' specifies how to encode and
1800decode strings passed to low-level message functions like strerror and
b718982a
PE
1801time functions like strftime. The new variables
1802`system-messages-locale' and `system-time-locale' give the system
1803locales to be used when invoking these two types of functions.
fbc164de
PE
1804
1805The new function `set-locale-environment' sets the language
1806environment, preferred coding system, and locale coding system from
1807the system locale as specified by the LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG
b718982a
PE
1808environment variables. Normally, it is invoked during startup and need
1809not be invoked thereafter. It uses the new variables
1810`locale-language-names', `locale-charset-language-names', and
1811`locale-preferred-coding-systems' to make its decisions.
fbc164de 1812
02b14400 1813+++
863476d1
SM
1814** syntax tables now understand nested comments.
1815To declare a comment syntax as allowing nesting, just add an `n'
1816modifier to either of the characters of the comment end and the comment
1817start sequences.
1818
02b14400 1819+++
ef6d912c
GM
1820** The function `pixmap-spec-p' has been renamed `bitmap-spec-p'
1821because `bitmap' is more in line with the usual X terminology.
1822
02b14400 1823+++
a933dad1
DL
1824** New function `propertize'
1825
1826The new function `propertize' can be used to conveniently construct
1827strings with text properties.
1828
1829- Function: propertize STRING &rest PROPERTIES
1830
1831Value is a copy of STRING with text properties assigned as specified
1832by PROPERTIES. PROPERTIES is a sequence of pairs PROPERTY VALUE, with
1833PROPERTY being the name of a text property and VALUE being the
1834specified value of that property. Example:
1835
1836 (propertize "foo" 'face 'bold 'read-only t)
1837
1838+++
1839** push and pop macros.
1840
02b14400
RS
1841Simple versions of the push and pop macros of Common Lisp
1842are now defined in Emacs Lisp. These macros allow only symbols
a933dad1
DL
1843as the place that holds the list to be changed.
1844
1845(push NEWELT LISTNAME) add NEWELT to the front of LISTNAME's value.
1846(pop LISTNAME) return first elt of LISTNAME, and remove it
1847 (thus altering the value of LISTNAME).
1848
02b14400
RS
1849** New dolist and dotimes macros.
1850
6c7fd5aa
RS
1851Simple versions of the dolist and dotimes macros of Common Lisp
1852are now defined in Emacs Lisp.
02b14400
RS
1853
1854(dolist (VAR LIST [RESULT]) BODY...)
1855 Execute body once for each element of LIST,
1856 using the variable VAR to hold the current element.
1857 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
1858
1859(dotimes (VAR COUNT [RESULT]) BODY...)
1860 Execute BODY with VAR bound to successive integers running from 0,
1861 inclusive, to COUNT, exclusive.
1862 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
1863
a933dad1
DL
1864+++
1865** Regular expressions now support Posix character classes such
1866as [:alpha:], [:space:] and so on.
1867
1868[:digit:] matches 0 through 9
1869[:cntrl:] matches ASCII control characters
1870[:xdigit:] matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F.
1871[:blank:] matches space and tab only
1872[:graph:] matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars,
1873 space, and DEL.
1874[:print:] matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars
1875 and DEL.
1876[:alnum:] matches letters and digits.
1877 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
1878 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
1879[:alpha:] matches letters.
1880 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
1881 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
1882[:ascii:] matches ASCII (unibyte) characters.
1883[:nonascii:] matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters.
1884[:lower:] matches anything lower-case.
1885[:punct:] matches punctuation.
1886 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
1887 it matches anything that has non-word syntax.)
1888[:space:] matches anything that has whitespace syntax.
1889[:upper:] matches anything upper-case.
1890[:word:] matches anything that has word syntax.
1891
1892+++
1893** Emacs now has built-in hash tables.
1894
1895The following functions are defined for hash tables:
1896
1897- Function: make-hash-table ARGS
1898
1899The argument list ARGS consists of keyword/argument pairs. All arguments
1900are optional. The following arguments are defined:
1901
1902:test TEST
1903
1904TEST must be a symbol specifying how to compare keys. Default is `eql'.
1905Predefined are `eq', `eql' and `equal'. If TEST is not predefined,
1906it must have been defined with `define-hash-table-test'.
1907
1908:size SIZE
1909
1910SIZE must be an integer > 0 giving a hint to the implementation how
1911many elements will be put in the hash table. Default size is 65.
1912
1913:rehash-size REHASH-SIZE
1914
1915REHASH-SIZE specifies by how much to grow a hash table once it becomes
1916full. If REHASH-SIZE is an integer, add that to the hash table's old
1917size to get the new size. Otherwise, REHASH-SIZE must be a float >
19181.0, and the new size is computed by multiplying REHASH-SIZE with the
1919old size. Default rehash size is 1.5.
1920
1921:rehash-threshold THRESHOLD
1922
1923THRESHOLD must be a float > 0 and <= 1.0 specifying when to resize the
1924hash table. It is resized when the ratio of (number of entries) /
1925(size of hash table) is >= THRESHOLD. Default threshold is 0.8.
1926
1927:weakness WEAK
1928
b548072f
GM
1929WEAK must be either nil, one of the symbols `key, `value',
1930`key-or-value', `key-and-value', or t, meaning the same as
1931`key-and-value'. Entries are removed from weak tables during garbage
1932collection if their key and/or value are not referenced elsewhere
1933outside of the hash table. Default are non-weak hash tables.
a933dad1
DL
1934
1935- Function: makehash &optional TEST
1936
1937Similar to make-hash-table, but only TEST can be specified.
1938
1939- Function: hash-table-p TABLE
1940
1941Returns non-nil if TABLE is a hash table object.
1942
1943- Function: copy-hash-table TABLE
1944
1945Returns a copy of TABLE. Only the table itself is copied, keys and
1946values are shared.
1947
1948- Function: hash-table-count TABLE
1949
1950Returns the number of entries in TABLE.
1951
1952- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
1953
1954Returns the rehash size of TABLE.
1955
1956- Function: hash-table-rehash-threshold TABLE
1957
1958Returns the rehash threshold of TABLE.
1959
1960- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
1961
1962Returns the size of TABLE.
1963
d96d6bb0 1964- Function: hash-table-test TABLE
a933dad1
DL
1965
1966Returns the test TABLE uses to compare keys.
1967
1968- Function: hash-table-weakness TABLE
1969
1970Returns the weakness specified for TABLE.
1971
1972- Function: clrhash TABLE
1973
1974Clear TABLE.
1975
1976- Function: gethash KEY TABLE &optional DEFAULT
1977
1978Look up KEY in TABLE and return its associated VALUE or DEFAULT if
1979not found.
1980
79214ddf 1981- Function: puthash KEY VALUE TABLE
a933dad1
DL
1982
1983Associate KEY with VALUE in TABLE. If KEY is already associated with
1984another value, replace the old value with VALUE.
1985
1986- Function: remhash KEY TABLE
1987
1988Remove KEY from TABLE if it is there.
1989
1990- Function: maphash FUNCTION TABLE
1991
1992Call FUNCTION for all elements in TABLE. FUNCTION must take two
1993arguments KEY and VALUE.
1994
1995- Function: sxhash OBJ
1996
1997Return a hash code for Lisp object OBJ.
1998
1999- Function: define-hash-table-test NAME TEST-FN HASH-FN
2000
2001Define a new hash table test named NAME. If NAME is specified as
2002a test in `make-hash-table', the table created will use TEST-FN for
79214ddf 2003comparing keys, and HASH-FN to compute hash codes for keys. Test
a933dad1
DL
2004and hash function are stored as symbol property `hash-table-test'
2005of NAME with a value of (TEST-FN HASH-FN).
2006
2007TEST-FN must take two arguments and return non-nil if they are the same.
2008
2009HASH-FN must take one argument and return an integer that is the hash
2010code of the argument. The function should use the whole range of
2011integer values for hash code computation, including negative integers.
2012
2013Example: The following creates a hash table whose keys are supposed to
2014be strings that are compared case-insensitively.
2015
2016 (defun case-fold-string= (a b)
2017 (compare-strings a nil nil b nil nil t))
2018
2019 (defun case-fold-string-hash (a)
2020 (sxhash (upcase a)))
2021
79214ddf 2022 (define-hash-table-test 'case-fold 'case-fold-string=
a933dad1
DL
2023 'case-fold-string-hash))
2024
2025 (make-hash-table :test 'case-fold)
2026
2027+++
2028** The Lisp reader handles circular structure.
2029
2030It now works to use the #N= and #N# constructs to represent
2031circular structures. For example, #1=(a . #1#) represents
2032a cons cell which is its own cdr.
2033
2034+++
2035** The Lisp printer handles circular structure.
2036
2037If you bind print-circle to a non-nil value, the Lisp printer outputs
2038#N= and #N# constructs to represent circular and shared structure.
2039
a933dad1
DL
2040+++
2041** If the second argument to `move-to-column' is anything but nil or
2042t, that means replace a tab with spaces if necessary to reach the
2043specified column, but do not add spaces at the end of the line if it
2044is too short to reach that column.
2045
2046+++
2047** perform-replace has a new feature: the REPLACEMENTS argument may
2048now be a cons cell (FUNCTION . DATA). This means to call FUNCTION
2049after each match to get the replacement text. FUNCTION is called with
2050two arguments: DATA, and the number of replacements already made.
2051
2052If the FROM-STRING contains any upper-case letters,
2053perform-replace also turns off `case-fold-search' temporarily
2054and inserts the replacement text without altering case in it.
2055
2056+++
2057** The function buffer-size now accepts an optional argument
2058to specify which buffer to return the size of.
2059
2060+++
2061** The calendar motion commands now run the normal hook
2062calendar-move-hook after moving point.
2063
2064+++
2065** The new variable small-temporary-file-directory specifies a
2066directory to use for creating temporary files that are likely to be
2067small. (Certain Emacs features use this directory.) If
2068small-temporary-file-directory is nil, they use
2069temporary-file-directory instead.
2070
2071+++
2072** The variable `inhibit-modification-hooks', if non-nil, inhibits all
2073the hooks that track changes in the buffer. This affects
2074`before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions', as well as
2075hooks attached to text properties and overlay properties.
2076
2077+++
2078** assoc-delete-all is a new function that deletes all the
2079elements of an alist which have a particular value as the car.
2080
2081+++
2082** make-temp-file provides a more reliable way to create a temporary file.
2083
2084make-temp-file is used like make-temp-name, except that it actually
2085creates the file before it returns. This prevents a timing error,
2086ensuring that no other job can use the same name for a temporary file.
2087
2088+++
2089** New exclusive-open feature in `write-region'
2090
2091The optional seventh arg is now called MUSTBENEW. If non-nil, it insists
2092on a check for an existing file with the same name. If MUSTBENEW
2093is `excl', that means to get an error if the file already exists;
2094never overwrite. If MUSTBENEW is neither nil nor `excl', that means
2095ask for confirmation before overwriting, but do go ahead and
2096overwrite the file if the user gives confirmation.
2097
2098If the MUSTBENEW argument in `write-region' is `excl',
2099that means to use a special feature in the `open' system call
2100to get an error if the file exists at that time.
2101The error reported is `file-already-exists'.
2102
2103+++
2104** Function `format' now handles text properties.
2105
2106Text properties of the format string are applied to the result string.
2107If the result string is longer than the format string, text properties
2108ending at the end of the format string are extended to the end of the
2109result string.
2110
2111Text properties from string arguments are applied to the result
2112string where arguments appear in the result string.
2113
2114Example:
2115
2116 (let ((s1 "hello, %s")
2117 (s2 "world"))
2118 (put-text-property 0 (length s1) 'face 'bold s1)
2119 (put-text-property 0 (length s2) 'face 'italic s2)
b246b1f6 2120 (format s1 s2))
a933dad1
DL
2121
2122results in a bold-face string with an italic `world' at the end.
2123
2124+++
2125** Messages can now be displayed with text properties.
2126
2127Text properties are handled as described above for function `format'.
2128The following example displays a bold-face message with an italic
2129argument in it.
2130
2131 (let ((msg "hello, %s!")
2132 (arg "world"))
2133 (put-text-property 0 (length msg) 'face 'bold msg)
2134 (put-text-property 0 (length arg) 'face 'italic arg)
2135 (message msg arg))
2136
2137+++
2138** Sound support
2139
2140Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs
2141(Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver).
2142
2143Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio
2144(*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes'
2145to enable sound support.
2146
2147Sound files can be played by calling (play-sound SOUND). SOUND is a
2148list of the form `(sound PROPERTY...)'. The function is only defined
2149when sound support is present for the system on which Emacs runs. The
2150functions runs `play-sound-functions' with one argument which is the
2151sound to play, before playing the sound.
2152
2153The following sound properties are supported:
2154
2155- `:file FILE'
2156
2157FILE is a file name. If FILE isn't an absolute name, it will be
2158searched relative to `data-directory'.
2159
6fb40beb
GM
2160- `:data DATA'
2161
2162DATA is a string containing sound data. Either :file or :data
2163may be present, but not both.
2164
a933dad1
DL
2165- `:volume VOLUME'
2166
2167VOLUME must be an integer in the range 0..100 or a float in the range
21680..1. This property is optional.
2169
2170Other properties are ignored.
2171
2172** `multimedia' is a new Finder keyword and Custom group.
356673d4
DL
2173
2174** keywordp is a new predicate to test efficiently for an object being
2175a keyword symbol.
fc91dc2d
GM
2176
2177** Changes to garbage collection
2178
2179*** The function garbage-collect now additionally returns the number
2180of live and free strings.
2181
2182*** There is a new variable `strings-consed' holding the number of
2183strings that have been consed so far.
2184
a933dad1 2185\f
04545643
GM
2186* Lisp-level Display features added after release 2.6 of the Emacs
2187Lisp Manual
2188
9a8d84ca
DL
2189+++
2190** Help strings in menu items are now used to provide `help-echo' text.
2c69ced2
GM
2191
2192** The function `image-size' can be used to determine the size of an
2193image.
2194
2195- Function: image-size SPEC &optional PIXELS FRAME
2196
2197Return the size of an image as a pair (WIDTH . HEIGHT).
2198
2199SPEC is an image specification. PIXELS non-nil means return sizes
2200measured in pixels, otherwise return sizes measured in canonical
2201character units (fractions of the width/height of the frame's default
2202font). FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed.
2203FRAME nil or omitted means use the selected frame.
2204
0b8a3a6d
DL
2205** The function `find-image' can be used to find a usable image
2206satisfying one of a list of specifications.
2207
2208+++
2209** The STRING argument of `put-image' and `insert-image' is now
2210optional.
2211
04545643
GM
2212** Image specifications may contain the property `:ascent center'.
2213
2214When this property is specified, the image is vertically centered
2215around a centerline which would be the vertical center of text drawn
2216at the position of the image, in the manner specified by the text
2217properties and overlays that apply to the image.
2218
2219\f
a933dad1
DL
2220* New Lisp-level Display features in Emacs 21.1
2221
2222Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
2223--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
2224When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
2225so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
2226
f6d3257b
GM
2227** The function tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors can be used
2228to make Emacs avoid displaying text with bold black foreground on TTYs.
2229
2230Some terminals, notably PC consoles, emulate bold text by displaying
2231text in brighter colors. On such a console, a bold black foreground
2232is displayed in a gray color. If this turns out to be hard to read on
2233your monitor---the problem occurred with the mode line on
2234laptops---you can instruct Emacs to ignore the text's boldness, and to
2235just display it black instead.
2236
2237This situation can't be detected automatically. You will have to put
2238a line like
2239
2240 (tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors t)
2241
2242in your `.emacs'.
2243
a933dad1
DL
2244** New face implementation.
2245
2246Emacs faces have been reimplemented from scratch. They don't use XLFD
2247font names anymore and face merging now works as expected.
2248
2249+++
2250*** New faces.
2251
2252Each face can specify the following display attributes:
2253
2254 1. Font family or fontset alias name.
79214ddf 2255
a933dad1
DL
2256 2. Relative proportionate width, aka character set width or set
2257 width (swidth), e.g. `semi-compressed'.
79214ddf 2258
a933dad1 2259 3. Font height in 1/10pt
79214ddf 2260
a933dad1 2261 4. Font weight, e.g. `bold'.
79214ddf 2262
a933dad1 2263 5. Font slant, e.g. `italic'.
79214ddf 2264
a933dad1 2265 6. Foreground color.
79214ddf 2266
a933dad1
DL
2267 7. Background color.
2268
2269 8. Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what color.
2270
2271 9. Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video.
2272
2273 10. A background stipple, a bitmap.
2274
2275 11. Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color.
2276
2277 12. Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what
2278 color.
2279
2280 13. Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its
2281 color, the width of the box lines, and 3D appearance.
2282
2283Faces are frame-local by nature because Emacs allows to define the
2284same named face (face names are symbols) differently for different
2285frames. Each frame has an alist of face definitions for all named
2286faces. The value of a named face in such an alist is a Lisp vector
2287with the symbol `face' in slot 0, and a slot for each each of the face
2288attributes mentioned above.
2289
2290There is also a global face alist `face-new-frame-defaults'. Face
2291definitions from this list are used to initialize faces of newly
2292created frames.
79214ddf 2293
a933dad1
DL
2294A face doesn't have to specify all attributes. Those not specified
2295have a nil value. Faces specifying all attributes are called
2296`fully-specified'.
2297
2298+++
2299*** Face merging.
2300
2301The display style of a given character in the text is determined by
2302combining several faces. This process is called `face merging'. Any
2303aspect of the display style that isn't specified by overlays or text
2304properties is taken from the `default' face. Since it is made sure
2305that the default face is always fully-specified, face merging always
2306results in a fully-specified face.
2307
2308+++
2309*** Face realization.
2310
2311After all face attributes for a character have been determined by
2312merging faces of that character, that face is `realized'. The
2313realization process maps face attributes to what is physically
2314available on the system where Emacs runs. The result is a `realized
2315face' in form of an internal structure which is stored in the face
2316cache of the frame on which it was realized.
2317
2318Face realization is done in the context of the charset of the
2319character to display because different fonts and encodings are used
2320for different charsets. In other words, for characters of different
2321charsets, different realized faces are needed to display them.
2322
2323Except for composite characters, faces are always realized for a
2324specific character set and contain a specific font, even if the face
2325being realized specifies a fontset. The reason is that the result of
2326the new font selection stage is better than what can be done with
2327statically defined font name patterns in fontsets.
2328
2329In unibyte text, Emacs' charsets aren't applicable; function
2330`char-charset' reports ASCII for all characters, including those >
23310x7f. The X registry and encoding of fonts to use is determined from
2332the variable `face-default-registry' in this case. The variable is
2333initialized at Emacs startup time from the font the user specified for
2334Emacs.
2335
2336Currently all unibyte text, i.e. all buffers with
2337`enable-multibyte-characters' nil are displayed with fonts of the same
2338registry and encoding `face-default-registry'. This is consistent
2339with the fact that languages can also be set globally, only.
2340
2341++++
2342**** Clearing face caches.
2343
2344The Lisp function `clear-face-cache' can be called to clear face caches
2345on all frames. If called with a non-nil argument, it will also unload
2346unused fonts.
2347
2348+++
2349*** Font selection.
79214ddf 2350
a933dad1
DL
2351Font selection tries to find the best available matching font for a
2352given (charset, face) combination. This is done slightly differently
2353for faces specifying a fontset, or a font family name.
2354
2355If the face specifies a fontset name, that fontset determines a
2356pattern for fonts of the given charset. If the face specifies a font
2357family, a font pattern is constructed. Charset symbols have a
2358property `x-charset-registry' for that purpose that maps a charset to
2359an XLFD registry and encoding in the font pattern constructed.
2360
2361Available fonts on the system on which Emacs runs are then matched
2362against the font pattern. The result of font selection is the best
2363match for the given face attributes in this font list.
2364
2365Font selection can be influenced by the user.
2366
2367The user can specify the relative importance he gives the face
2368attributes width, height, weight, and slant by setting
2369face-font-selection-order (faces.el) to a list of face attribute
2370names. The default is (:width :height :weight :slant), and means
2371that font selection first tries to find a good match for the font
2372width specified by a face, then---within fonts with that width---tries
2373to find a best match for the specified font height, etc.
2374
2375Setting `face-alternative-font-family-alist' allows the user to
2376specify alternative font families to try if a family specified by a
2377face doesn't exist.
2378
2379+++
2380**** Scalable fonts
2381
2382Emacs can make use of scalable fonts but doesn't do so by default,
2383since the use of too many or too big scalable fonts may crash XFree86
2384servers.
2385
2386To enable scalable font use, set the variable
b246b1f6 2387`scalable-fonts-allowed'. A value of nil, the default, means never use
a933dad1
DL
2388scalable fonts. A value of t means any scalable font may be used.
2389Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. A
2390scalable font may then be used if it matches a regular expression from
2391that list. Example:
2392
2393 (setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("muleindian-2$"))
2394
2395allows the use of scalable fonts with registry `muleindian-2'.
2396
2397+++
2398*** Functions and variables related to font selection.
2399
2400- Function: x-family-fonts &optional FAMILY FRAME
2401
2402Return a list of available fonts of family FAMILY on FRAME. If FAMILY
2403is omitted or nil, list all families. Otherwise, FAMILY must be a
2404string, possibly containing wildcards `?' and `*'.
2405
2406If FRAME is omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Each element of
2407the result is a vector [FAMILY WIDTH POINT-SIZE WEIGHT SLANT FIXED-P
2408FULL REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING]. FAMILY is the font family name.
2409POINT-SIZE is the size of the font in 1/10 pt. WIDTH, WEIGHT, and
2410SLANT are symbols describing the width, weight and slant of the font.
2411These symbols are the same as for face attributes. FIXED-P is non-nil
2412if the font is fixed-pitch. FULL is the full name of the font, and
2413REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING is a string giving the registry and encoding of
2414the font. The result list is sorted according to the current setting
2415of the face font sort order.
2416
79214ddf 2417- Function: x-font-family-list
a933dad1
DL
2418
2419Return a list of available font families on FRAME. If FRAME is
2420omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Value is a list of conses
2421(FAMILY . FIXED-P) where FAMILY is a font family, and FIXED-P is
2422non-nil if fonts of that family are fixed-pitch.
2423
2424- Variable: font-list-limit
2425
2426Limit for font matching. If an integer > 0, font matching functions
2427won't load more than that number of fonts when searching for a
2428matching font. The default is currently 100.
2429
2430+++
2431*** Setting face attributes.
2432
2433For the most part, the new face implementation is interface-compatible
2434with the old one. Old face attribute related functions are now
2435implemented in terms of the new functions `set-face-attribute' and
2436`face-attribute'.
2437
2438Face attributes are identified by their names which are keyword
2439symbols. All attributes can be set to `unspecified'.
2440
2441The following attributes are recognized:
2442
2443`:family'
2444
2445VALUE must be a string specifying the font family, e.g. ``courier'',
2446or a fontset alias name. If a font family is specified, wild-cards `*'
2447and `?' are allowed.
2448
2449`:width'
2450
2451VALUE specifies the relative proportionate width of the font to use.
2452It must be one of the symbols `ultra-condensed', `extra-condensed',
2453`condensed', `semi-condensed', `normal', `semi-expanded', `expanded',
2454`extra-expanded', or `ultra-expanded'.
2455
2456`:height'
2457
2458VALUE must be an integer specifying the height of the font to use in
24591/10 pt.
2460
2461`:weight'
2462
2463VALUE specifies the weight of the font to use. It must be one of the
2464symbols `ultra-bold', `extra-bold', `bold', `semi-bold', `normal',
2465`semi-light', `light', `extra-light', `ultra-light'.
2466
2467`:slant'
2468
2469VALUE specifies the slant of the font to use. It must be one of the
2470symbols `italic', `oblique', `normal', `reverse-italic', or
2471`reverse-oblique'.
2472
2473`:foreground', `:background'
2474
2475VALUE must be a color name, a string.
2476
2477`:underline'
2478
2479VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be underlined. If
2480VALUE is t, underline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is
2481a string, underline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly
2482don't underline.
2483
2484`:overline'
2485
2486VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be overlined. If
2487VALUE is t, overline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is a
2488string, overline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't
2489overline.
2490
2491`:strike-through'
2492
2493VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be drawn with a line
2494striking through them. If VALUE is t, use the foreground color of the
2495face. If VALUE is a string, strike-through with that color. If VALUE
2496is nil, explicitly don't strike through.
2497
2498`:box'
2499
2500VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should have a box drawn
2501around them. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't draw boxes. If
2502VALUE is t, draw a box with lines of width 1 in the foreground color
2503of the face. If VALUE is a string, the string must be a color name,
2504and the box is drawn in that color with a line width of 1. Otherwise,
2505VALUE must be a property list of the form `(:line-width WIDTH
2506:color COLOR :style STYLE)'. If a keyword/value pair is missing from
2507the property list, a default value will be used for the value, as
2508specified below. WIDTH specifies the width of the lines to draw; it
2509defaults to 1. COLOR is the name of the color to draw in, default is
2510the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background
2511color of the face for 3D boxes. STYLE specifies whether a 3D box
2512should be draw. If STYLE is `released-button', draw a box looking
2513like a released 3D button. If STYLE is `pressed-button' draw a box
2514that appears like a pressed button. If STYLE is nil, the default if
2515the property list doesn't contain a style specification, draw a 2D
2516box.
2517
2518`:inverse-video'
2519
2520VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be displayed in
2521inverse video. VALUE must be one of t or nil.
2522
2523`:stipple'
2524
2525If VALUE is a string, it must be the name of a file of pixmap data.
2526The directories listed in the `x-bitmap-file-path' variable are
2527searched. Alternatively, VALUE may be a list of the form (WIDTH
2528HEIGHT DATA) where WIDTH and HEIGHT are the size in pixels, and DATA
2529is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap. VALUE nil means
2530explicitly don't use a stipple pattern.
2531
2532For convenience, attributes `:family', `:width', `:height', `:weight',
2533and `:slant' may also be set in one step from an X font name:
2534
2535`:font'
2536
2537Set font-related face attributes from VALUE. VALUE must be a valid
2538XLFD font name. If it is a font name pattern, the first matching font
2539is used--this is for compatibility with the behavior of previous
2540versions of Emacs.
2541
2542For compatibility with Emacs 20, keywords `:bold' and `:italic' can
2543be used to specify that a bold or italic font should be used. VALUE
2544must be t or nil in that case. A value of `unspecified' is not allowed."
2545
2546Please see also the documentation of `set-face-attribute' and
2547`defface'.
2548
2549*** Face attributes and X resources
2550
2551The following X resource names can be used to set face attributes
2552from X resources:
2553
2554 Face attribute X resource class
2555-----------------------------------------------------------------------
2556 :family attributeFamily . Face.AttributeFamily
2557 :width attributeWidth Face.AttributeWidth
2558 :height attributeHeight Face.AttributeHeight
2559 :weight attributeWeight Face.AttributeWeight
2560 :slant attributeSlant Face.AttributeSlant
2561 foreground attributeForeground Face.AttributeForeground
2562 :background attributeBackground . Face.AttributeBackground
2563 :overline attributeOverline Face.AttributeOverline
2564 :strike-through attributeStrikeThrough Face.AttributeStrikeThrough
2565 :box attributeBox Face.AttributeBox
2566 :underline attributeUnderline Face.AttributeUnderline
2567 :inverse-video attributeInverse Face.AttributeInverse
2568 :stipple attributeStipple Face.AttributeStipple
79214ddf 2569 or attributeBackgroundPixmap
a933dad1
DL
2570 Face.AttributeBackgroundPixmap
2571 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
2572 :bold attributeBold Face.AttributeBold
2573 :italic attributeItalic . Face.AttributeItalic
2574 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
2575
2576+++
2577*** Text property `face'.
2578
2579The value of the `face' text property can now be a single face
2580specification or a list of such specifications. Each face
2581specification can be
2582
25831. A symbol or string naming a Lisp face.
2584
25852. A property list of the form (KEYWORD VALUE ...) where each
2586 KEYWORD is a face attribute name, and VALUE is an appropriate value
2587 for that attribute. Please see the doc string of `set-face-attribute'
2588 for face attribute names.
2589
25903. Conses of the form (FOREGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) or
2591 (BACKGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) where COLOR is a color name. This is
2592 for compatibility with previous Emacs versions.
2593
2594+++
2595** Support functions for colors on text-only terminals.
2596
acf3ecb7
EZ
2597The function `tty-color-define' can be used to define colors for use
2598on TTY and MSDOS frames. It maps a color name to a color number on
2599the terminal. Emacs defines a couple of common color mappings by
a933dad1 2600default. You can get defined colors with a call to
acf3ecb7 2601`defined-colors'. The function `tty-color-clear' can be
a933dad1
DL
2602used to clear the mapping table.
2603
acf3ecb7
EZ
2604** Unified support for colors independent of frame type.
2605
2606The new functions `defined-colors', `color-defined-p', `color-values',
2607and `display-color-p' work for any type of frame. On frames whose
2608type is neither x nor w32, these functions transparently map X-style
2609color specifications to the closest colors supported by the frame
2610display. Lisp programs should use these new functions instead of the
2611old `x-defined-colors', `x-color-defined-p', `x-color-values', and
2612`x-display-color-p'. (The old function names are still available for
2613compatibility; they are now aliases of the new names.) Lisp programs
2614should no more look at the value of the variable window-system to
2615modify their color-related behavior.
2616
2617The primitives `color-gray-p' and `color-supported-p' also work for
2618any frame type.
2619
8a5719f0
EZ
2620** Platform-independent functions to describe display capabilities.
2621
2622The new functions `display-mouse-p', `display-popup-menus-p',
2623`display-graphic-p', `display-selections-p', `display-screens',
2624`display-pixel-width', `display-pixel-height', `display-mm-width',
2625`display-mm-height', `display-backing-store', `display-save-under',
2626`display-planes', `display-color-cells', `display-visual-class', and
2627`display-grayscale-p' describe the basic capabilities of a particular
2628display. Lisp programs should call these functions instead of testing
2629the value of the variables `window-system' or `system-type', or calling
2630platform-specific functions such as `x-display-pixel-width'.
2631
a933dad1
DL
2632+++
2633** The minibuffer prompt is now actually inserted in the minibuffer.
a933dad1 2634
463cac2d 2635This makes it possible to scroll through the prompt, if you want to.
a933dad1
DL
2636
2637The function minubuffer-prompt-end returns the current position of the
2638end of the minibuffer prompt, if the minibuffer is current.
2639Otherwise, it returns zero.
2640
463cac2d
GM
2641** New `field' abstraction in buffers.
2642
2643There is now code to support an abstraction called `fields' in emacs
2644buffers. A field is a contiguous region of text with the same `field'
59927f88 2645property (which can be a text property or an overlay).
463cac2d 2646
9a9dfda8 2647Many emacs functions, such as forward-word, forward-sentence,
463cac2d 2648forward-paragraph, beginning-of-line, etc., stop moving when they come
9a9dfda8 2649to the boundary between fields; beginning-of-line and end-of-line will
463cac2d 2650not let the point move past the field boundary, but other movement
fc7ac24f
GM
2651commands continue into the next field if repeated. Stopping at field
2652boundaries can be suppressed programmatically by binding
2653`inhibit-field-text-motion' to a non-nil value around calls to these
2654functions.
463cac2d
GM
2655
2656Now that the minibuffer prompt is inserted into the minibuffer, it is in
9a9dfda8 2657a separate field from the user-input part of the buffer, so that common
463cac2d 2658editing commands treat the user's text separately from the prompt.
a933dad1 2659
9a9dfda8
GM
2660The following functions are defined for operating on fields:
2661
59927f88 2662- Function: constrain-to-field NEW-POS OLD-POS &optional ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE ONLY-IN-LINE INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY
9a9dfda8
GM
2663
2664Return the position closest to NEW-POS that is in the same field as OLD-POS.
59927f88 2665
9a9dfda8
GM
2666A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2667If NEW-POS is nil, then the current point is used instead, and set to the
2668constrained position if that is is different.
2669
2670If OLD-POS is at the boundary of two fields, then the allowable
2671positions for NEW-POS depends on the value of the optional argument
2672ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE: If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is nil, then NEW-POS is
59927f88 2673constrained to the field that has the same `field' char-property
9a9dfda8
GM
2674as any new characters inserted at OLD-POS, whereas if ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
2675is non-nil, NEW-POS is constrained to the union of the two adjacent
59927f88
MB
2676fields. Additionally, if two fields are separated by another field with
2677the special value `boundary', then any point within this special field is
2678also considered to be `on the boundary'.
9a9dfda8
GM
2679
2680If the optional argument ONLY-IN-LINE is non-nil and constraining
2681NEW-POS would move it to a different line, NEW-POS is returned
2682unconstrained. This useful for commands that move by line, like
2683C-n or C-a, which should generally respect field boundaries
2684only in the case where they can still move to the right line.
2685
59927f88
MB
2686If the optional argument INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY is non-nil, and OLD-POS has
2687a non-nil property of that name, then any field boundaries are ignored.
2688
2689Field boundaries are not noticed if `inhibit-field-text-motion' is non-nil.
2690
2691- Function: delete-field &optional POS
9a9dfda8 2692
59927f88 2693Delete the field surrounding POS.
9a9dfda8 2694A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 2695If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8
GM
2696
2697- Function: field-beginning &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
2698
2699Return the beginning of the field surrounding POS.
2700A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88
MB
2701If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
2702If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the beginning of its
9a9dfda8
GM
2703field, then the beginning of the *previous* field is returned.
2704
2705- Function: field-end &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
2706
2707Return the end of the field surrounding POS.
2708A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88
MB
2709If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
2710If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the end of its field,
9a9dfda8
GM
2711then the end of the *following* field is returned.
2712
2713- Function: field-string &optional POS
2714
2715Return the contents of the field surrounding POS as a string.
2716A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 2717If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8
GM
2718
2719- Function: field-string-no-properties &optional POS
2720
2721Return the contents of the field around POS, without text-properties.
2722A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 2723If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8 2724
a933dad1
DL
2725+++
2726** Image support.
2727
2728Emacs can now display images. Images are inserted into text by giving
2729strings or buffer text a `display' text property containing one of
2730(AREA IMAGE) or IMAGE. The display of the `display' property value
2731replaces the display of the characters having that property.
2732
2733If the property value has the form (AREA IMAGE), AREA must be one of
2734`(margin left-margin)', `(margin right-margin)' or `(margin nil)'. If
2735AREA is `(margin nil)', IMAGE will be displayed in the text area of a
2736window, otherwise it will be displayed in the left or right marginal
2737area.
2738
2739IMAGE is an image specification.
2740
2741*** Image specifications
2742
2743Image specifications are lists of the form `(image PROPS)' where PROPS
2744is a property list whose keys are keyword symbols. Each
2745specifications must contain a property `:type TYPE' with TYPE being a
35a5514b
GM
2746symbol specifying the image type, e.g. `xbm'. Properties not
2747described below are ignored.
a933dad1
DL
2748
2749The following is a list of properties all image types share.
2750
2751`:ascent ASCENT'
2752
576da55d
GM
2753ASCENT must be a number in the range 0..100, or the symbol `center'.
2754If it is a number, it specifies the percentage of the image's height
5d94f558 2755to use for its ascent.
576da55d
GM
2756
2757If not specified, ASCENT defaults to the value 50 which means that the
2758image will be centered with the base line of the row it appears in.
2759
5d94f558 2760If ASCENT is `center' the image is vertically centered around a
04545643
GM
2761centerline which is the vertical center of text drawn at the position
2762of the image, in the manner specified by the text properties and
2763overlays that apply to the image.
a933dad1
DL
2764
2765`:margin MARGIN'
2766
79214ddf 2767MARGIN must be a number >= 0 specifying how many pixels to put as
a933dad1
DL
2768margin around the image. Default is 0.
2769
2770`:relief RELIEF'
2771
2772RELIEF is analogous to the `:relief' attribute of faces. Puts a relief
2773around an image.
2774
2775`:algorithm ALGO'
2776
2777Apply an image algorithm to the image before displaying it. ALGO must
2778be a symbol specifying the algorithm. Currently only `laplace' is
2779supported which applies a Laplace edge detection algorithm to an image
2780which is intended to display images "disabled."
2781
2782`:heuristic-mask BG'
2783
2784If BG is not nil, build a clipping mask for the image, so that the
2785background of a frame is visible behind the image. If BG is t,
2786determine the background color of the image by looking at the 4
2787corners of the image, assuming the most frequently occuring color from
2788the corners is the background color of the image. Otherwise, BG must
2789be a list `(RED GREEN BLUE)' specifying the color to assume for the
2790background of the image.
2791
2792`:file FILE'
2793
2794Load image from FILE. If FILE is not absolute after expanding it,
2795search for the image in `data-directory'. Some image types support
2796building images from data. When this is done, no `:file' property
2797may be present in the image specification.
2798
518df5c4
GM
2799`:data DATA'
2800
2801Get image data from DATA. (As of this writing, this is not yet
2802supported for image type `postscript'). Either :file or :data may be
2803present in an image specification, but not both. All image types
2804support strings as DATA, some types allow additional types of DATA.
2805
a933dad1
DL
2806*** Supported image types
2807
b246b1f6 2808**** XBM, image type `xbm'.
a933dad1
DL
2809
2810XBM images don't require an external library. Additional image
2811properties supported are
2812
2813`:foreground FG'
2814
2815FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default
2816is the frame's foreground.
2817
2818`:background FG'
2819
2820BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is
2821the frame's background color.
2822
2823XBM images can be constructed from data instead of file. In this
2824case, the image specification must contain the following properties
2825instead of a `:file' property.
2826
2827`:width WIDTH'
2828
2829WIDTH specifies the width of the image in pixels.
2830
2831`:height HEIGHT'
2832
2833HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pixels.
2834
2835`:data DATA'
2836
2837DATA must be either
2838
2839 1. a string large enough to hold the bitmap data, i.e. it must
2840 have a size >= (WIDTH + 7) / 8 * HEIGHT
2841
2842 2. a bool-vector of size >= WIDTH * HEIGHT
2843
2844 3. a vector of strings or bool-vectors, one for each line of the
2845 bitmap.
2846
c76e04a8
GM
2847 4. a string that's an in-memory XBM file. Neither width nor
2848 height may be specified in this case because these are defined
2849 in the file.
2850
a933dad1
DL
2851**** XPM, image type `xpm'
2852
2853XPM images require the external library `libXpm', package
2854`xpm-3.4k.tar.gz', version 3.4k or later. Make sure the library is
2855found when Emacs is configured by supplying appropriate paths via
2856`--x-includes' and `--x-libraries'.
2857
2858Additional image properties supported are:
2859
2860`:color-symbols SYMBOLS'
2861
2862SYMBOLS must be a list of pairs (NAME . COLOR), with NAME being the
2863name of color as it appears in an XPM file, and COLOR being an X color
2864name.
2865
2866XPM images can be built from memory instead of files. In that case,
2867add a `:data' property instead of a `:file' property.
2868
a933dad1
DL
2869The XPM library uses libz in its implementation so that it is able
2870to display compressed images.
2871
2872**** PBM, image type `pbm'
2873
2874PBM images don't require an external library. Color, gray-scale and
2875mono images are supported. There are no additional image properties
2876defined.
2877
2878**** JPEG, image type `jpeg'
2879
2880Support for JPEG images requires the external library `libjpeg',
3bd37feb
GM
2881package `jpegsrc.v6a.tar.gz', or later. Additional image properties
2882are:
2883
a933dad1
DL
2884**** TIFF, image type `tiff'
2885
2886Support for TIFF images requires the external library `libtiff',
2887package `tiff-v3.4-tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
2888properties defined.
2889
2890**** GIF, image type `gif'
2891
2892Support for GIF images requires the external library `libungif', package
2893`libungif-4.1.0', or later.
2894
2895Additional image properties supported are:
2896
2897`:index INDEX'
2898
2899INDEX must be an integer >= 0. Load image number INDEX from a
2900multi-image GIF file. An error is signalled if INDEX is too large.
2901
2902This could be used to implement limited support for animated GIFs.
2903For example, the following function displays a multi-image GIF file
2904at point-min in the current buffer, switching between sub-images
2905every 0.1 seconds.
2906
2907(defun show-anim (file max)
2908 "Display multi-image GIF file FILE which contains MAX subimages."
2909 (display-anim (current-buffer) file 0 max t))
2910
2911(defun display-anim (buffer file idx max first-time)
2912 (when (= idx max)
2913 (setq idx 0))
518df5c4 2914 (let ((img (create-image file nil nil :index idx)))
a933dad1
DL
2915 (save-excursion
2916 (set-buffer buffer)
2917 (goto-char (point-min))
2918 (unless first-time (delete-char 1))
2919 (insert-image img "x"))
2920 (run-with-timer 0.1 nil 'display-anim buffer file (1+ idx) max nil)))
2921
2922**** PNG, image type `png'
2923
2924Support for PNG images requires the external library `libpng',
2925package `libpng-1.0.2.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
2926properties defined.
2927
2928**** Ghostscript, image type `postscript'.
2929
2930Additional image properties supported are:
2931
2932`:pt-width WIDTH'
2933
2934WIDTH is width of the image in pt (1/72 inch). WIDTH must be an
b246b1f6 2935integer. This is a required property.
a933dad1
DL
2936
2937`:pt-height HEIGHT'
2938
2939HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pt (1/72 inch). HEIGHT
b246b1f6 2940must be a integer. This is an required property.
a933dad1
DL
2941
2942`:bounding-box BOX'
2943
2944BOX must be a list or vector of 4 integers giving the bounding box of
2945the PS image, analogous to the `BoundingBox' comment found in PS
2946files. This is an required property.
2947
2948Part of the Ghostscript interface is implemented in Lisp. See
2949lisp/gs.el.
2950
2951*** Lisp interface.
2952
79214ddf
FP
2953The variable `image-types' contains a list of those image types
2954which are supported in the current configuration.
a933dad1
DL
2955
2956Images are stored in an image cache and removed from the cache when
2957they haven't been displayed for `image-cache-eviction-delay seconds.
2958The function `clear-image-cache' can be used to clear the image cache
084cec2f
GM
2959manually. Images in the cache are compared with `equal', i.e. all
2960images with `equal' specifications share the same image.
a933dad1
DL
2961
2962*** Simplified image API, image.el
2963
2964The new Lisp package image.el contains functions that simplify image
2965creation and putting images into text. The function `create-image'
2966can be used to create images. The macro `defimage' can be used to
2967define an image based on available image types. The functions
2968`put-image' and `insert-image' can be used to insert an image into a
2969buffer.
2970
2971+++
2972** Display margins.
2973
2974Windows can now have margins which are used for special text
2975and images.
2976
2977To give a window margins, either set the buffer-local variables
2978`left-margin-width' and `right-margin-width', or call
2979`set-window-margins'. The function `window-margins' can be used to
2980obtain the current settings. To make `left-margin-width' and
2981`right-margin-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying
2982the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update
2983of the display margins.
2984
2985You can put text in margins by giving it a `display' text property
2986containing a pair of the form `(LOCATION . VALUE)', where LOCATION is
2987one of `left-margin' or `right-margin' or nil. VALUE can be either a
2988string, an image specification or a stretch specification (see later
2989in this file).
2990
2991+++
2992** Help display
2993
2994Emacs displays short help messages in the echo area, when the mouse
2995moves over a tool-bar item or a piece of text that has a text property
2996`help-echo'. This feature also applies to strings in the mode line
2997that have a `help-echo' property.
2998
9662da0b 2999If the value of the `help-echo' property is a function, that function
85a8aca9 3000is called with three arguments WINDOW, OBJECT and POSITION. WINDOW is
c20aeb83
GM
3001the window in which the help was found.
3002
3003If OBJECT is a buffer, POS is the position in the buffer where the
3004`help-echo' text property was found.
3005
3006If OBJECT is an overlay, that overlay has a `help-echo' property, and
3007POS is the position in the overlay's buffer under the mouse.
3008
3009If OBJECT is a string (an overlay string or a string displayed with
5ed8d5af 3010the `display' property), POS is the position in that string under the
c20aeb83 3011mouse.
d5aa31d8 3012
9662da0b
GM
3013If the value of the `help-echo' property is neither a function nor a
3014string, it is evaluated to obtain a help string.
3015
3016For tool-bar and menu-bar items, their key definition is used to
3017determine the help to display. If their definition contains a
3018property `:help FORM', FORM is evaluated to determine the help string.
3019For tool-bar items without a help form, the caption of the item is
3020used as help string.
a933dad1
DL
3021
3022The hook `show-help-function' can be set to a function that displays
f0298744
DL
3023the help string differently. For example, enabling a tooltip window
3024causes the help display to appear there instead of in the echo area.
a933dad1
DL
3025
3026+++
3027** Vertical fractional scrolling.
3028
3029The display of text in windows can be scrolled smoothly in pixels.
3030This is useful, for example, for making parts of large images visible.
3031
3032The function `window-vscroll' returns the current value of vertical
3033scrolling, a non-negative fraction of the canonical character height.
3034The function `set-window-vscroll' can be used to set the vertical
3035scrolling value. Here is an example of how these function might be
3036used.
3037
79214ddf
FP
3038 (global-set-key [A-down]
3039 #'(lambda ()
a933dad1 3040 (interactive)
79214ddf 3041 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1 3042 (+ 0.5 (window-vscroll)))))
79214ddf 3043 (global-set-key [A-up]
a933dad1
DL
3044 #'(lambda ()
3045 (interactive)
79214ddf 3046 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1
DL
3047 (- (window-vscroll) 0.5)))))
3048
3049+++
3050** New hook `fontification-functions'.
3051
3052Functions from `fontification-functions' are called from redisplay
3053when it encounters a region of text that is not yet fontified. This
3054variable automatically becomes buffer-local when set. Each function
3055is called with one argument, POS.
3056
3057At least one of the hook functions should fontify one or more
3058characters starting at POS in the current buffer. It should mark them
3059as fontified by giving them a non-nil value of the `fontified' text
3060property. It may be reasonable for these functions to check for the
3061`fontified' property and not put it back on, but they do not have to.
3062
3063+++
3064** Tool bar support.
3065
3066Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. The frame
3067parameter `tool-bar-lines' (X resource "toolBar", class "ToolBar")
3068controls how may lines to reserve for the tool bar. A zero value
3069suppresses the tool bar. If the value is non-zero and
3070`auto-resize-tool-bars' is non-nil the tool bar's size will be changed
3071automatically so that all tool bar items are visible.
3072
3073*** Tool bar item definitions
3074
3075Tool bar items are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key
3076`tool-bar'. For example `(define-key global-map [tool-bar item1] ITEM)'
3077where ITEM is a list `(menu-item CAPTION BINDING PROPS...)'.
79214ddf 3078
a933dad1
DL
3079CAPTION is the caption of the item, If it's not a string, it is
3080evaluated to get a string. The caption is currently not displayed in
3081the tool bar, but it is displayed if the item doesn't have a `:help'
3082property (see below).
79214ddf 3083
a933dad1
DL
3084BINDING is the tool bar item's binding. Tool bar items with keymaps as
3085binding are currently ignored.
3086
3087The following properties are recognized:
3088
3089`:enable FORM'.
79214ddf 3090
a933dad1
DL
3091FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is enabled
3092or disabled.
79214ddf 3093
a933dad1 3094`:visible FORM'
79214ddf 3095
a933dad1 3096FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is displayed.
79214ddf 3097
a933dad1
DL
3098`:filter FUNCTION'
3099
3100FUNCTION is called with one parameter, the same list BINDING in which
3101FUNCTION is specified as the filter. The value FUNCTION returns is
3102used instead of BINDING to display this item.
79214ddf 3103
a933dad1
DL
3104`:button (TYPE SELECTED)'
3105
3106TYPE must be one of `:radio' or `:toggle'. SELECTED is evaluated
3107and specifies whether the button is selected (pressed) or not.
79214ddf 3108
a933dad1
DL
3109`:image IMAGES'
3110
3111IMAGES is either a single image specification or a vector of four
3112image specifications. If it is a vector, this table lists the
3113meaning of each of the four elements:
3114
3115 Index Use when item is
3116 ----------------------------------------
3117 0 enabled and selected
3118 1 enabled and deselected
3119 2 disabled and selected
3120 3 disabled and deselected
79214ddf 3121
4ba7246d
GM
3122If IMAGE is a single image specification, a Laplace edge-detection
3123algorithm is used on that image to draw the image in disabled state.
3124
a933dad1 3125`:help HELP-STRING'.
79214ddf 3126
a933dad1
DL
3127Gives a help string to display for the tool bar item. This help
3128is displayed when the mouse is moved over the item.
3129
3130*** Tool-bar-related variables.
3131
3132If `auto-resize-tool-bar' is non-nil, the tool bar will automatically
3133resize to show all defined tool bar items. It will never grow larger
3134than 1/4 of the frame's size.
3135
79214ddf 3136If `auto-raise-tool-bar-buttons' is non-nil, tool bar buttons will be
a933dad1
DL
3137raised when the mouse moves over them.
3138
3139You can add extra space between tool bar items by setting
3140`tool-bar-button-margin' to a positive integer specifying a number of
3141pixels. Default is 1.
3142
3143You can change the shadow thickness of tool bar buttons by setting
3144`tool-bar-button-relief' to an integer. Default is 3.
3145
3146*** Tool-bar clicks with modifiers.
3147
3148You can bind commands to clicks with control, shift, meta etc. on
79214ddf 3149a tool bar item. If
a933dad1
DL
3150
3151 (define-key global-map [tool-bar shell]
3152 '(menu-item "Shell" shell
3153 :image (image :type xpm :file "shell.xpm")))
3154
3155is the original tool bar item definition, then
3156
3157 (define-key global-map [tool-bar S-shell] 'some-command)
3158
3159makes a binding to run `some-command' for a shifted click on the same
3160item.
3161
3162** Mode line changes.
3163
3164+++
3165*** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
3166
3167The mode line can be made mouse-sensitive by displaying strings there
3168that have a `local-map' text property. There are three ways to display
3169a string with a `local-map' property in the mode line.
3170
31711. The mode line spec contains a variable whose string value has
3172a `local-map' text property.
3173
31742. The mode line spec contains a format specifier (e.g. `%12b'), and
3175that format specifier has a `local-map' property.
3176
31773. The mode line spec contains a list containing `:eval FORM'. FORM
3178is evaluated. If the result is a string, and that string has a
3179`local-map' property.
3180
3181The same mechanism is used to determine the `face' and `help-echo'
3182properties of strings in the mode line. See `bindings.el' for an
3183example.
3184
54522c9f
GM
3185*** If a mode line element has the form `(:eval FORM)', FORM is
3186evaluated and the result is used as mode line element.
3187
a933dad1
DL
3188+++
3189*** You can suppress mode-line display by setting the buffer-local
3190variable mode-line-format to nil.
3191
3192+++
3193*** A headerline can now be displayed at the top of a window.
3194
3195This mode line's contents are controlled by the new variable
3196`header-line-format' and `default-header-line-format' which are
3197completely analogous to `mode-line-format' and
3198`default-mode-line-format'. A value of nil means don't display a top
3199line.
3200
3201The appearance of top mode lines is controlled by the face
3202`header-line'.
3203
3204The function `coordinates-in-window-p' returns `header-line' for a
3205position in the header-line.
3206
3207+++
3208** Text property `display'
3209
3210The `display' text property is used to insert images into text, and
3211also control other aspects of how text displays. The value of the
3212`display' property should be a display specification, as described
3213below, or a list or vector containing display specifications.
3214
3215*** Variable width and height spaces
3216
3217To display a space of fractional width or height, use a display
3218specification of the form `(LOCATION STRECH)'. If LOCATION is
3219`(margin left-margin)', the space is displayed in the left marginal
3220area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in the right
3221marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the space is
3222displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
3223simpler form STRETCH as property value.
3224
3225The stretch specification STRETCH itself is a list of the form `(space
3226PROPS)', where PROPS is a property list which can contain the
3227properties described below.
3228
3229The display of the fractional space replaces the display of the
3230characters having the `display' property.
3231
3232- :width WIDTH
3233
3234Specifies that the space width should be WIDTH times the normal
3235character width. WIDTH can be an integer or floating point number.
3236
3237- :relative-width FACTOR
3238
3239Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the
3240first character in a group of consecutive characters that have the
3241same `display' property. The computation is done by multiplying the
3242width of that character by FACTOR.
3243
3244- :align-to HPOS
3245
3246Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach HPOS. The
3247value HPOS is measured in units of the normal character width.
3248
3249Exactly one of the above properties should be used.
3250
3251- :height HEIGHT
3252
3253Specifies the height of the space, as HEIGHT, measured in terms of the
3254normal line height.
3255
3256- :relative-height FACTOR
3257
3258The height of the space is computed as the product of the height
3259of the text having the `display' property and FACTOR.
3260
3261- :ascent ASCENT
3262
3263Specifies that ASCENT percent of the height of the stretch should be
3264used for the ascent of the stretch, i.e. for the part above the
3265baseline. The value of ASCENT must be a non-negative number less or
3266equal to 100.
3267
3268You should not use both `:height' and `:relative-height' together.
3269
3270*** Images
3271
3272A display specification for an image has the form `(LOCATION
3273. IMAGE)', where IMAGE is an image specification. The image replaces,
3274in the display, the characters having this display specification in
3275their `display' text property. If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)',
3276the image will be displayed in the left marginal area, if it is
3277`(margin right-margin)' it will be displayed in the right marginal
3278area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the image will be displayed in
3279the text. In the latter case you can also use the simpler form IMAGE
3280as display specification.
3281
3282*** Other display properties
3283
3284- :space-width FACTOR
3285
3286Specifies that space characters in the text having that property
3287should be displayed FACTOR times as wide as normal; FACTOR must be an
3288integer or float.
3289
3290- :height HEIGHT
3291
3292Display text having this property in a font that is smaller or larger.
3293
3294If HEIGHT is a list of the form `(+ N)', where N is an integer, that
3295means to use a font that is N steps larger. If HEIGHT is a list of
3296the form `(- N)', that means to use a font that is N steps smaller. A
3297``step'' is defined by the set of available fonts; each size for which
3298a font is available counts as a step.
3299
3300If HEIGHT is a number, that means to use a font that is HEIGHT times
3301as tall as the frame's default font.
3302
3303If HEIGHT is a symbol, it is called as a function with the current
3304height as argument. The function should return the new height to use.
3305
3306Otherwise, HEIGHT is evaluated to get the new height, with the symbol
3307`height' bound to the current specified font height.
3308
3309- :raise FACTOR
3310
3311FACTOR must be a number, specifying a multiple of the current
3312font's height. If it is positive, that means to display the characters
3313raised. If it is negative, that means to display them lower down. The
3314amount of raising or lowering is computed without taking account of the
3315`:height' subproperty.
3316
3317*** Conditional display properties
3318
3319All display specifications can be conditionalized. If a specification
3320has the form `(:when CONDITION . SPEC)', the specification SPEC
3321applies only when CONDITION yields a non-nil value when evaluated.
3322During evaluattion, point is temporarily set to the end position of
3323the text having the `display' property.
3324
3325The normal specification consisting of SPEC only is equivalent to
3326`(:when t SPEC)'.
3327
3328+++
3329** New menu separator types.
3330
3331Emacs now supports more than one menu separator type. Menu items with
3332item names consisting of dashes only (including zero dashes) are
3333treated like before. In addition, the following item names are used
3334to specify other menu separator types.
3335
3336- `--no-line' or `--space', or `--:space', or `--:noLine'
3337
3338No separator lines are drawn, but a small space is inserted where the
3339separator occurs.
3340
3341- `--single-line' or `--:singleLine'
3342
3343A single line in the menu's foreground color.
3344
3345- `--double-line' or `--:doubleLine'
3346
3347A double line in the menu's foreground color.
3348
3349- `--single-dashed-line' or `--:singleDashedLine'
3350
3351A single dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
3352
3353- `--double-dashed-line' or `--:doubleDashedLine'
3354
3355A double dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
3356
3357- `--shadow-etched-in' or `--:shadowEtchedIn'
3358
3359A single line with 3D sunken appearance. This is the the form
3360displayed for item names consisting of dashes only.
3361
3362- `--shadow-etched-out' or `--:shadowEtchedOut'
3363
3364A single line with 3D raised appearance.
3365
3366- `--shadow-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedInDash'
3367
3368A single dashed line with 3D sunken appearance.
3369
3370- `--shadow-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedOutDash'
3371
3372A single dashed line with 3D raise appearance.
3373
3374- `--shadow-double-etched-in' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedIn'
3375
3376Two lines with 3D sunken appearance.
3377
3378- `--shadow-double-etched-out' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOut'
3379
3380Two lines with 3D raised appearance.
3381
3382- `--shadow-double-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedInDash'
3383
3384Two dashed lines with 3D sunken appearance.
3385
3386- `--shadow-double-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOutDash'
3387
3388Two dashed lines with 3D raised appearance.
3389
3390Under LessTif/Motif, the last four separator types are displayed like
3391the corresponding single-line separators.
3392
3393+++
3394** New frame parameters for scroll bar colors.
3395
3396The new frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
3397`scroll-bar-background' can be used to change scroll bar colors.
3398Their value must be either a color name, a string, or nil to specify
3399that scroll bars should use a default color. For toolkit scroll bars,
3400default colors are toolkit specific. For non-toolkit scroll bars, the
3401default background is the background color of the frame, and the
3402default foreground is black.
3403
3404The X resource name of these parameters are `scrollBarForeground'
3405(class ScrollBarForeground) and `scrollBarBackground' (class
3406`ScrollBarBackground').
3407
3408Setting these parameters overrides toolkit specific X resource
3409settings for scroll bar colors.
3410
3411+++
3412** You can set `redisplay-dont-pause' to a non-nil value to prevent
3413display updates from being interrupted when input is pending.
3414
3415---
3416** Changing a window's width may now change its window start if it
3417starts on a continuation line. The new window start is computed based
3418on the window's new width, starting from the start of the continued
3419line as the start of the screen line with the minimum distance from
3420the original window start.
3421
3422---
3423** The variable `hscroll-step' and the functions
3424`hscroll-point-visible' and `hscroll-window-column' have been removed
3425now that proper horizontal scrolling is implemented.
3426
3427+++
3428** Windows can now be made fixed-width and/or fixed-height.
3429
3430A window is fixed-size if its buffer has a buffer-local variable
3431`window-size-fixed' whose value is not nil. A value of `height' makes
3432windows fixed-height, a value of `width' makes them fixed-width, any
3433other non-nil value makes them both fixed-width and fixed-height.
3434
3435The following code makes all windows displaying the current buffer
3436fixed-width and fixed-height.
3437
3438 (set (make-local-variable 'window-size-fixed) t)
3439
3440A call to enlarge-window on a window gives an error if that window is
3441fixed-width and it is tried to change the window's width, or if the
3442window is fixed-height, and it is tried to change its height. To
3443change the size of a fixed-size window, bind `window-size-fixed'
3444temporarily to nil, for example
3445
3446 (let ((window-size-fixed nil))
3447 (enlarge-window 10))
3448
79214ddf 3449Likewise, an attempt to split a fixed-height window vertically,
a933dad1 3450or a fixed-width window horizontally results in a error.
e411ce4b
EZ
3451
3452** The cursor-type frame parameter is now supported on MS-DOS
3453terminals. When Emacs starts, it by default changes the cursor shape
3454to a solid box, as it does on Unix. The `cursor-type' frame parameter
3455overrides this as it does on Unix, except that the bar cursor is
3456horizontal rather than vertical (since the MS-DOS display doesn't
3457support a vertical-bar cursor).
76299050 3458
3787e12e
GM
3459
3460^L
3461* Emacs 20.7 is a bug-fix release with few user-visible changes
3462
3463** It is now possible to use CCL-based coding systems for keyboard
3464input.
3465
3466** ange-ftp now handles FTP security extensions, like Kerberos.
3467
3468** Rmail has been extended to recognize more forms of digest messages.
3469
3470** Now, most coding systems set in keyboard coding system work not
3471only for character input, but also in incremental search. The
3472exceptions are such coding systems that handle 2-byte character sets
3473(e.g euc-kr, euc-jp) and that use ISO's escape sequence
3474(e.g. iso-2022-jp). They are ignored in incremental search.
3475
3476** Support for Macintosh PowerPC-based machines running GNU/Linux has
3477been added.
3478
3479^L
3480* Emacs 20.6 is a bug-fix release with one user-visible change
3481
3482** Support for ARM-based non-RISCiX machines has been added.
3483
3484^L
3485* Emacs 20.5 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
3486
3487** Not new, but not mentioned before:
3488M-w when Transient Mark mode is enabled disables the mark.
3489\f
3490* Changes in Emacs 20.4
3491
3492** Init file may be called .emacs.el.
3493
3494You can now call the Emacs init file `.emacs.el'.
3495Formerly the name had to be `.emacs'. If you use the name
3496`.emacs.el', you can byte-compile the file in the usual way.
3497
3498If both `.emacs' and `.emacs.el' exist, the latter file
3499is the one that is used.
3500
3501** shell-command, and shell-command-on-region, now return
3502the exit code of the command (unless it is asynchronous).
3503Also, you can specify a place to put the error output,
3504separate from the command's regular output.
3505Interactively, the variable shell-command-default-error-buffer
3506says where to put error output; set it to a buffer name.
3507In calls from Lisp, an optional argument ERROR-BUFFER specifies
3508the buffer name.
3509
3510When you specify a non-nil error buffer (or buffer name), any error
3511output is inserted before point in that buffer, with \f\n to separate
3512it from the previous batch of error output. The error buffer is not
3513cleared, so error output from successive commands accumulates there.
3514
3515** Setting the default value of enable-multibyte-characters to nil in
3516the .emacs file, either explicitly using setq-default, or via Custom,
3517is now essentially equivalent to using --unibyte: all buffers
3518created during startup will be made unibyte after loading .emacs.
3519
3520** C-x C-f now handles the wildcards * and ? in file names. For
3521example, typing C-x C-f c*.c RET visits all the files whose names
3522match c*.c. To visit a file whose name contains * or ?, add the
3523quoting sequence /: to the beginning of the file name.
3524
3525** The M-x commands keep-lines, flush-lines and count-matches
3526now have the same feature as occur and query-replace:
3527if the pattern contains any upper case letters, then
3528they never ignore case.
3529
3530** The end-of-line format conversion feature previously mentioned
3531under `* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows' actually
3532applies to all operating systems. Emacs recognizes from the contents
3533of a file what convention it uses to separate lines--newline, CRLF, or
3534just CR--and automatically converts the contents to the normal Emacs
3535convention (using newline to separate lines) for editing. This is a
3536part of the general feature of coding system conversion.
3537
3538If you subsequently save the buffer, Emacs converts the text back to
3539the same format that was used in the file before.
3540
3541You can turn off end-of-line conversion by setting the variable
3542`inhibit-eol-conversion' to non-nil, e.g. with Custom in the MULE group.
3543
3544** The character set property `prefered-coding-system' has been
3545renamed to `preferred-coding-system', for the sake of correct spelling.
3546This is a fairly internal feature, so few programs should be affected.
3547
3548** Mode-line display of end-of-line format is changed.
3549The indication of the end-of-line format of the file visited by a
3550buffer is now more explicit when that format is not the usual one for
3551your operating system. For example, the DOS-style end-of-line format
3552is displayed as "(DOS)" on Unix and GNU/Linux systems. The usual
3553end-of-line format is still displayed as a single character (colon for
3554Unix, backslash for DOS and Windows, and forward slash for the Mac).
3555
3556The values of the variables eol-mnemonic-unix, eol-mnemonic-dos,
3557eol-mnemonic-mac, and eol-mnemonic-undecided, which are strings,
3558control what is displayed in the mode line for each end-of-line
3559format. You can now customize these variables.
3560
3561** In the previous version of Emacs, tar-mode didn't work well if a
3562filename contained non-ASCII characters. Now this is fixed. Such a
3563filename is decoded by file-name-coding-system if the default value of
3564enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil.
3565
3566** The command temp-buffer-resize-mode toggles a minor mode
3567in which temporary buffers (such as help buffers) are given
3568windows just big enough to hold the whole contents.
3569
3570** If you use completion.el, you must now run the function
3571dynamic-completion-mode to enable it. Just loading the file
3572doesn't have any effect.
3573
3574** In Flyspell mode, the default is now to make just one Ispell process,
3575not one per buffer.
3576
3577** If you use iswitchb but do not call (iswitchb-default-keybindings) to
3578use the default keybindings, you will need to add the following line:
3579 (add-hook 'minibuffer-setup-hook 'iswitchb-minibuffer-setup)
3580
3581** Auto-show mode is no longer enabled just by loading auto-show.el.
3582To control it, set `auto-show-mode' via Custom or use the
3583`auto-show-mode' command.
3584
3585** Handling of X fonts' ascent/descent parameters has been changed to
3586avoid redisplay problems. As a consequence, compared with previous
3587versions the line spacing and frame size now differ with some font
3588choices, typically increasing by a pixel per line. This change
3589occurred in version 20.3 but was not documented then.
3590
3591** If you select the bar cursor style, it uses the frame's
3592cursor-color, rather than the cursor foreground pixel.
3593
3594** In multibyte mode, Rmail decodes incoming MIME messages using the
3595character set specified in the message. If you want to disable this
3596feature, set the variable rmail-decode-mime-charset to nil.
3597
3598** Not new, but not mentioned previously in NEWS: when you use #! at
3599the beginning of a file to make it executable and specify an
3600interpreter program, Emacs looks on the second line for the -*- mode
3601and variable specification, as well as on the first line.
3602
3603** Support for IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters.
3604
3605The new command M-x codepage-setup creates a special coding system
3606that can be used to convert text between a specific IBM codepage and
3607one of the character sets built into Emacs which matches that
3608codepage. For example, codepage 850 corresponds to Latin-1 character
3609set, codepage 855 corresponds to Cyrillic-ISO character set, etc.
3610
3611Windows codepages 1250, 1251 and some others, where Windows deviates
3612from the corresponding ISO character set, are also supported.
3613
3614IBM box-drawing characters and other glyphs which don't have
3615equivalents in the corresponding ISO character set, are converted to
3616a character defined by dos-unsupported-char-glyph on MS-DOS, and to
3617`?' on other systems.
3618
3619IBM codepages are widely used on MS-DOS and MS-Windows, so this
3620feature is most useful on those platforms, but it can also be used on
3621Unix.
3622
3623Emacs compiled for MS-DOS automatically loads the support for the
3624current codepage when it starts.
3625
3626** Mail changes
3627
3628*** When mail is sent using compose-mail (C-x m), and if
3629`mail-send-nonascii' is set to the new default value `mime',
3630appropriate MIME headers are added. The headers are added only if
3631non-ASCII characters are present in the body of the mail, and no other
3632MIME headers are already present. For example, the following three
3633headers are added if the coding system used in the *mail* buffer is
3634latin-1:
3635
3636 MIME-version: 1.0
3637 Content-type: text/plain; charset=iso-8859-1
3638 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit
3639
3640*** The new variable default-sendmail-coding-system specifies the
3641default way to encode outgoing mail. This has higher priority than
3642default-buffer-file-coding-system but has lower priority than
3643sendmail-coding-system and the local value of
3644buffer-file-coding-system.
3645
3646You should not set this variable manually. Instead, set
3647sendmail-coding-system to specify a fixed encoding for all outgoing
3648mail.
3649
3650*** When you try to send a message that contains non-ASCII characters,
3651if the coding system specified by those variables doesn't handle them,
3652Emacs will ask you to select a suitable coding system while showing a
3653list of possible coding systems.
3654
3655** CC Mode changes
3656
3657*** c-default-style can now take an association list that maps major
3658modes to style names. When this variable is an alist, Java mode no
3659longer hardcodes a setting to "java" style. See the variable's
3660docstring for details.
3661
3662*** It's now possible to put a list as the offset on a syntactic
3663symbol. The list is evaluated recursively until a non-nil offset is
3664found. This is useful to combine several lineup functions to act in a
3665prioritized order on a single line. However, none of the supplied
3666lineup functions use this feature currently.
3667
3668*** New syntactic symbol catch-clause, which is used on the "catch" and
3669"finally" lines in try-catch constructs in C++ and Java.
3670
3671*** New cleanup brace-catch-brace on c-cleanup-list, which does for
3672"catch" lines what brace-elseif-brace does for "else if" lines.
3673
3674*** The braces of Java anonymous inner classes are treated separately
3675from the braces of other classes in auto-newline mode. Two new
3676symbols inexpr-class-open and inexpr-class-close may be used on
3677c-hanging-braces-alist to control the automatic newlines used for
3678anonymous classes.
3679
3680*** Support for the Pike language added, along with new Pike specific
3681syntactic symbols: inlambda, lambda-intro-cont
3682
3683*** Support for Java anonymous classes via new syntactic symbol
3684inexpr-class. New syntactic symbol inexpr-statement for Pike
3685support and gcc-style statements inside expressions. New lineup
3686function c-lineup-inexpr-block.
3687
3688*** New syntactic symbol brace-entry-open which is used in brace lists
3689(i.e. static initializers) when a list entry starts with an open
3690brace. These used to be recognized as brace-list-entry's.
3691c-electric-brace also recognizes brace-entry-open braces
3692(brace-list-entry's can no longer be electrified).
3693
3694*** New command c-indent-line-or-region, not bound by default.
3695
3696*** `#' is only electric when typed in the indentation of a line.
3697
3698*** Parentheses are now electric (via the new command c-electric-paren)
3699for auto-reindenting lines when parens are typed.
3700
3701*** In "gnu" style, inline-open offset is now set to zero.
3702
3703*** Uniform handling of the inclass syntactic symbol. The indentation
3704associated with it is now always relative to the class opening brace.
3705This means that the indentation behavior has changed in some
3706circumstances, but only if you've put anything besides 0 on the
3707class-open syntactic symbol (none of the default styles do that).
3708
3709** Gnus changes.
3710
3711*** New functionality for using Gnus as an offline newsreader has been
3712added. A plethora of new commands and modes have been added. See the
3713Gnus manual for the full story.
3714
3715*** The nndraft backend has returned, but works differently than
3716before. All Message buffers are now also articles in the nndraft
3717group, which is created automatically.
3718
3719*** `gnus-alter-header-function' can now be used to alter header
3720values.
3721
3722*** `gnus-summary-goto-article' now accept Message-ID's.
3723
3724*** A new Message command for deleting text in the body of a message
3725outside the region: `C-c C-v'.
3726
3727*** You can now post to component group in nnvirtual groups with
3728`C-u C-c C-c'.
3729
3730*** `nntp-rlogin-program' -- new variable to ease customization.
3731
3732*** `C-u C-c C-c' in `gnus-article-edit-mode' will now inhibit
3733re-highlighting of the article buffer.
3734
3735*** New element in `gnus-boring-article-headers' -- `long-to'.
3736
3737*** `M-i' symbolic prefix command. See the section "Symbolic
3738Prefixes" in the Gnus manual for details.
3739
3740*** `L' and `I' in the summary buffer now take the symbolic prefix
3741`a' to add the score rule to the "all.SCORE" file.
3742
3743*** `gnus-simplify-subject-functions' variable to allow greater
3744control over simplification.
3745
3746*** `A T' -- new command for fetching the current thread.
3747
3748*** `/ T' -- new command for including the current thread in the
3749limit.
3750
3751*** `M-RET' is a new Message command for breaking cited text.
3752
3753*** \\1-expressions are now valid in `nnmail-split-methods'.
3754
3755*** The `custom-face-lookup' function has been removed.
3756If you used this function in your initialization files, you must
3757rewrite them to use `face-spec-set' instead.
3758
3759*** Cancelling now uses the current select method. Symbolic prefix
3760`a' forces normal posting method.
3761
3762*** New command to translate M******** sm*rtq**t*s into proper text
3763-- `W d'.
3764
3765*** For easier debugging of nntp, you can set `nntp-record-commands'
3766to a non-nil value.
3767
3768*** nntp now uses ~/.authinfo, a .netrc-like file, for controlling
3769where and how to send AUTHINFO to NNTP servers.
3770
3771*** A command for editing group parameters from the summary buffer
3772has been added.
3773
3774*** A history of where mails have been split is available.
3775
3776*** A new article date command has been added -- `article-date-iso8601'.
3777
3778*** Subjects can be simplified when threading by setting
3779`gnus-score-thread-simplify'.
3780
3781*** A new function for citing in Message has been added --
3782`message-cite-original-without-signature'.
3783
3784*** `article-strip-all-blank-lines' -- new article command.
3785
3786*** A new Message command to kill to the end of the article has
3787been added.
3788
3789*** A minimum adaptive score can be specified by using the
3790`gnus-adaptive-word-minimum' variable.
3791
3792*** The "lapsed date" article header can be kept continually
3793updated by the `gnus-start-date-timer' command.
3794
3795*** Web listserv archives can be read with the nnlistserv backend.
3796
3797*** Old dejanews archives can now be read by nnweb.
3798
3799*** `gnus-posting-styles' has been re-activated.
3800
3801** Changes to TeX and LaTeX mode
3802
3803*** The new variable `tex-start-options-string' can be used to give
3804options for the TeX run. The default value causes TeX to run in
3805nonstopmode. For an interactive TeX run set it to nil or "".
3806
3807*** The command `tex-feed-input' sends input to the Tex Shell. In a
3808TeX buffer it is bound to the keys C-RET, C-c RET, and C-c C-m (some
3809of these keys may not work on all systems). For instance, if you run
3810TeX interactively and if the TeX run stops because of an error, you
3811can continue it without leaving the TeX buffer by typing C-RET.
3812
3813*** The Tex Shell Buffer is now in `compilation-shell-minor-mode'.
3814All error-parsing commands of the Compilation major mode are available
3815but bound to keys that don't collide with the shell. Thus you can use
3816the Tex Shell for command line executions like a usual shell.
3817
3818*** The commands `tex-validate-region' and `tex-validate-buffer' check
3819the matching of braces and $'s. The errors are listed in a *Occur*
3820buffer and you can use C-c C-c or mouse-2 to go to a particular
3821mismatch.
3822
3823** Changes to RefTeX mode
3824
3825*** The table of contents buffer can now also display labels and
3826file boundaries in addition to sections. Use `l', `i', and `c' keys.
3827
3828*** Labels derived from context (the section heading) are now
3829lowercase by default. To make the label legal in LaTeX, latin-1
3830characters will lose their accent. All Mule characters will be
3831removed from the label.
3832
3833*** The automatic display of cross reference information can also use
3834a window instead of the echo area. See variable `reftex-auto-view-crossref'.
3835
3836*** kpsewhich can be used by RefTeX to find TeX and BibTeX files. See the
3837customization group `reftex-finding-files'.
3838
3839*** The option `reftex-bibfile-ignore-list' has been renamed to
3840`reftex-bibfile-ignore-regexps' and indeed can be fed with regular
3841expressions.
3842
3843*** Multiple Selection buffers are now hidden buffers.
3844
3845** New/deleted modes and packages
3846
3847*** The package snmp-mode.el provides major modes for editing SNMP and
3848SNMPv2 MIBs. It has entries on `auto-mode-alist'.
3849
3850*** The package sql.el provides a major mode, M-x sql-mode, for
3851editing SQL files, and M-x sql-interactive-mode for interacting with
3852SQL interpreters. It has an entry on `auto-mode-alist'.
3853
3854*** M-x highlight-changes-mode provides a minor mode displaying buffer
3855changes with a special face.
3856
3857*** ispell4.el has been deleted. It got in the way of ispell.el and
3858this was hard to fix reliably. It has long been obsolete -- use
3859Ispell 3.1 and ispell.el.
3860\f
3861* MS-DOS changes in Emacs 20.4
3862
3863** Emacs compiled for MS-DOS now supports MULE features better.
3864This includes support for display of all ISO 8859-N character sets,
3865conversion to and from IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters,
3866and automatic setup of the MULE environment at startup. For details,
3867check out the section `MS-DOS and MULE' in the manual.
3868
3869The MS-DOS installation procedure automatically configures and builds
3870Emacs with input method support if it finds an unpacked Leim
3871distribution when the config.bat script is run.
3872
3873** Formerly, the value of lpr-command did not affect printing on
3874MS-DOS unless print-region-function was set to nil, but now it
3875controls whether an external program is invoked or output is written
3876directly to a printer port. Similarly, in the previous version of
3877Emacs, the value of ps-lpr-command did not affect PostScript printing
3878on MS-DOS unless ps-printer-name was set to something other than a
3879string (eg. t or `pipe'), but now it controls whether an external
3880program is used. (These changes were made so that configuration of
3881printing variables would be almost identical across all platforms.)
3882
3883** In the previous version of Emacs, PostScript and non-PostScript
3884output was piped to external programs, but because most print programs
3885available for MS-DOS and MS-Windows cannot read data from their standard
3886input, on those systems the data to be output is now written to a
3887temporary file whose name is passed as the last argument to the external
3888program.
3889
3890An exception is made for `print', a standard program on Windows NT,
3891and `nprint', a standard program on Novell Netware. For both of these
3892programs, the command line is constructed in the appropriate syntax
3893automatically, using only the value of printer-name or ps-printer-name
3894as appropriate--the value of the relevant `-switches' variable is
3895ignored, as both programs have no useful switches.
3896
3897** The value of the variable dos-printer (cf. dos-ps-printer), if it has
3898a value, overrides the value of printer-name (cf. ps-printer-name), on
3899MS-DOS and MS-Windows only. This has been true since version 20.3, but
3900was not documented clearly before.
3901
3902** All the Emacs games now work on MS-DOS terminals.
3903This includes Tetris and Snake.
3904\f
3905* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.4
3906
3907** New functions line-beginning-position and line-end-position
3908return the position of the beginning or end of the current line.
3909They both accept an optional argument, which has the same
3910meaning as the argument to beginning-of-line or end-of-line.
3911
3912** find-file and allied functions now have an optional argument
3913WILDCARD. If this is non-nil, they do wildcard processing,
3914and visit all files that match the wildcard pattern.
3915
3916** Changes in the file-attributes function.
3917
3918*** The file size returned by file-attributes may be an integer or a float.
3919It is an integer if the size fits in a Lisp integer, float otherwise.
3920
3921*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
3922the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a cons cell containing two
3923integers.
3924
3925** The new function directory-files-and-attributes returns a list of
3926files in a directory and their attributes. It accepts the same
3927arguments as directory-files and has similar semantics, except that
3928file names and attributes are returned.
3929
3930** The new function file-attributes-lessp is a helper function for
3931sorting the list generated by directory-files-and-attributes. It
3932accepts two arguments, each a list of a file name and its atttributes.
3933It compares the file names of each according to string-lessp and
3934returns the result.
3935
3936** The new function file-expand-wildcards expands a wildcard-pattern
3937to produce a list of existing files that match the pattern.
3938
3939** New functions for base64 conversion:
3940
3941The function base64-encode-region converts a part of the buffer
3942into the base64 code used in MIME. base64-decode-region
3943performs the opposite conversion. Line-breaking is supported
3944optionally.
3945
3946Functions base64-encode-string and base64-decode-string do a similar
3947job on the text in a string. They return the value as a new string.
3948
3949**
3950The new function process-running-child-p
3951will tell you if a subprocess has given control of its
3952terminal to its own child process.
3953
3954** interrupt-process and such functions have a new feature:
3955when the second argument is `lambda', they send a signal
3956to the running child of the subshell, if any, but if the shell
3957itself owns its terminal, no signal is sent.
3958
3959** There are new widget types `plist' and `alist' which can
3960be used for customizing variables whose values are plists or alists.
3961
3962** easymenu.el Now understands `:key-sequence' and `:style button'.
3963:included is an alias for :visible.
3964
3965easy-menu-add-item now understands the values returned by
3966easy-menu-remove-item and easy-menu-item-present-p. This can be used
3967to move or copy menu entries.
3968
3969** Multibyte editing changes
3970
3971*** The definitions of sref and char-bytes are changed. Now, sref is
3972an alias of aref and char-bytes always returns 1. This change is to
3973make some Emacs Lisp code which works on 20.2 and earlier also
3974work on the latest Emacs. Such code uses a combination of sref and
3975char-bytes in a loop typically as below:
3976 (setq char (sref str idx)
3977 idx (+ idx (char-bytes idx)))
3978The byte-compiler now warns that this is obsolete.
3979
3980If you want to know how many bytes a specific multibyte character
3981(say, CH) occupies in a multibyte buffer, use this code:
3982 (charset-bytes (char-charset ch))
3983
3984*** In multibyte mode, when you narrow a buffer to some region, and the
3985region is preceded or followed by non-ASCII codes, inserting or
3986deleting at the head or the end of the region may signal this error:
3987
3988 Byte combining across boundary of accessible buffer text inhibitted
3989
3990This is to avoid some bytes being combined together into a character
3991across the boundary.
3992
3993*** The functions find-charset-region and find-charset-string include
3994`unknown' in the returned list in the following cases:
3995 o The current buffer or the target string is unibyte and
3996 contains 8-bit characters.
3997 o The current buffer or the target string is multibyte and
3998 contains invalid characters.
3999
4000*** The functions decode-coding-region and encode-coding-region remove
4001text properties of the target region. Ideally, they should correctly
4002preserve text properties, but for the moment, it's hard. Removing
4003text properties is better than preserving them in a less-than-correct
4004way.
4005
4006*** prefer-coding-system sets EOL conversion of default coding systems.
4007If the argument to prefer-coding-system specifies a certain type of
4008end of line conversion, the default coding systems set by
4009prefer-coding-system will specify that conversion type for end of line.
4010
4011*** The new function thai-compose-string can be used to properly
4012compose Thai characters in a string.
4013
4014** The primitive `define-prefix-command' now takes an optional third
4015argument NAME, which should be a string. It supplies the menu name
4016for the created keymap. Keymaps created in order to be displayed as
4017menus should always use the third argument.
4018
4019** The meanings of optional second arguments for read-char,
4020read-event, and read-char-exclusive are flipped. Now the second
4021arguments are INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. These functions use the current
4022input method (if any) if and only if INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD is non-nil.
4023
4024** The new function clear-this-command-keys empties out the contents
4025of the vector that (this-command-keys) returns. This is useful in
4026programs that read passwords, to prevent the passwords from echoing
4027inadvertently as part of the next command in certain cases.
4028
4029** The new macro `with-temp-message' displays a temporary message in
4030the echo area, while executing some Lisp code. Like `progn', it
4031returns the value of the last form, but it also restores the previous
4032echo area contents.
4033
4034 (with-temp-message MESSAGE &rest BODY)
4035
4036** The function `require' now takes an optional third argument
4037NOERROR. If it is non-nil, then there is no error if the
4038requested feature cannot be loaded.
4039
4040** In the function modify-face, an argument of (nil) for the
4041foreground color, background color or stipple pattern
4042means to clear out that attribute.
4043
4044** The `outer-window-id' frame property of an X frame
4045gives the window number of the outermost X window for the frame.
4046
4047** Temporary buffers made with with-output-to-temp-buffer are now
4048read-only by default, and normally use the major mode Help mode
4049unless you put them in some other non-Fundamental mode before the
4050end of with-output-to-temp-buffer.
4051
4052** The new functions gap-position and gap-size return information on
4053the gap of the current buffer.
4054
4055** The new functions position-bytes and byte-to-position provide a way
4056to convert between character positions and byte positions in the
4057current buffer.
4058
4059** vc.el defines two new macros, `edit-vc-file' and `with-vc-file', to
4060facilitate working with version-controlled files from Lisp programs.
4061These macros check out a given file automatically if needed, and check
4062it back in after any modifications have been made.
4063\f
4064* Installation Changes in Emacs 20.3
4065
4066** The default value of load-path now includes most subdirectories of
4067the site-specific directories /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp and
4068/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp, in addition to those
4069directories themselves. Both immediate subdirectories and
4070subdirectories multiple levels down are added to load-path.
4071
4072Not all subdirectories are included, though. Subdirectories whose
4073names do not start with a letter or digit are excluded.
4074Subdirectories named RCS or CVS are excluded. Also, a subdirectory
4075which contains a file named `.nosearch' is excluded. You can use
4076these methods to prevent certain subdirectories from being searched.
4077
4078Emacs finds these subdirectories and adds them to load-path when it
4079starts up. While it would be cleaner to find the subdirectories each
4080time Emacs loads a file, that would be much slower.
4081
4082This feature is an incompatible change. If you have stored some Emacs
4083Lisp files in a subdirectory of the site-lisp directory specifically
4084to prevent them from being used, you will need to rename the
4085subdirectory to start with a non-alphanumeric character, or create a
4086`.nosearch' file in it, in order to continue to achieve the desired
4087results.
4088
4089** Emacs no longer includes an old version of the C preprocessor from
4090GCC. This was formerly used to help compile Emacs with C compilers
4091that had limits on the significant length of an identifier, but in
4092fact we stopped supporting such compilers some time ago.
4093\f
4094* Changes in Emacs 20.3
4095
4096** The new command C-x z (repeat) repeats the previous command
4097including its argument. If you repeat the z afterward,
4098it repeats the command additional times; thus, you can
4099perform many repetitions with one keystroke per repetition.
4100
4101** Emacs now supports "selective undo" which undoes only within a
4102specified region. To do this, set point and mark around the desired
4103region and type C-u C-x u (or C-u C-_). You can then continue undoing
4104further, within the same region, by repeating the ordinary undo
4105command C-x u or C-_. This will keep undoing changes that were made
4106within the region you originally specified, until either all of them
4107are undone, or it encounters a change which crosses the edge of that
4108region.
4109
4110In Transient Mark mode, undoing when a region is active requests
4111selective undo.
4112
4113** If you specify --unibyte when starting Emacs, then all buffers are
4114unibyte, except when a Lisp program specifically creates a multibyte
4115buffer. Setting the environment variable EMACS_UNIBYTE has the same
4116effect. The --no-unibyte option overrides EMACS_UNIBYTE and directs
4117Emacs to run normally in multibyte mode.
4118
4119The option --unibyte does not affect the reading of Emacs Lisp files,
4120though. If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, use
4121-*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. That will force Emacs to
4122load that file in unibyte mode, regardless of how Emacs was started.
4123
4124** toggle-enable-multibyte-characters no longer has a key binding and
4125no longer appears in the menu bar. We've realized that changing the
4126enable-multibyte-characters variable in an existing buffer is
4127something that most users not do.
4128
4129** You can specify a coding system to use for the next cut or paste
4130operations through the window system with the command C-x RET X.
4131The coding system can make a difference for communication with other
4132applications.
4133
4134C-x RET x specifies a coding system for all subsequent cutting and
4135pasting operations.
4136
4137** You can specify the printer to use for commands that do printing by
4138setting the variable `printer-name'. Just what a printer name looks
4139like depends on your operating system. You can specify a different
4140printer for the Postscript printing commands by setting
4141`ps-printer-name'.
4142
4143** Emacs now supports on-the-fly spell checking by the means of a
4144minor mode. It is called M-x flyspell-mode. You don't have to remember
4145any other special commands to use it, and you will hardly notice it
4146except when you make a spelling error. Flyspell works by highlighting
4147incorrect words as soon as they are completed or as soon as the cursor
4148hits a new word.
4149
4150Flyspell mode works with whichever dictionary you have selected for
4151Ispell in Emacs. In TeX mode, it understands TeX syntax so as not
4152to be confused by TeX commands.
4153
4154You can correct a misspelled word by editing it into something
4155correct. You can also correct it, or accept it as correct, by
4156clicking on the word with Mouse-2; that gives you a pop-up menu
4157of various alternative replacements and actions.
4158
4159Flyspell mode also proposes "automatic" corrections. M-TAB replaces
4160the current misspelled word with a possible correction. If several
4161corrections are made possible, M-TAB cycles through them in
4162alphabetical order, or in order of decreasing likelihood if
4163flyspell-sort-corrections is nil.
4164
4165Flyspell mode also flags an error when a word is repeated, if
4166flyspell-mark-duplications-flag is non-nil.
4167
4168** Changes in input method usage.
4169
4170Now you can use arrow keys (right, left, down, up) for selecting among
4171the alternatives just the same way as you do by C-f, C-b, C-n, and C-p
4172respectively.
4173
4174You can use the ENTER key to accept the current conversion.
4175
4176If you type TAB to display a list of alternatives, you can select one
4177of the alternatives with Mouse-2.
4178
4179The meaning of the variable `input-method-verbose-flag' is changed so
4180that you can set it to t, nil, `default', or `complex-only'.
4181
4182 If the value is nil, extra guidance is never given.
4183
4184 If the value is t, extra guidance is always given.
4185
4186 If the value is `complex-only', extra guidance is always given only
4187 when you are using complex input methods such as chinese-py.
4188
4189 If the value is `default' (this is the default), extra guidance is
4190 given in the following case:
4191 o When you are using a complex input method.
4192 o When you are using a simple input method but not in the minibuffer.
4193
4194If you are using Emacs through a very slow line, setting
4195input-method-verbose-flag to nil or to complex-only is a good choice,
4196and if you are using an input method you are not familiar with,
4197setting it to t is helpful.
4198
4199The old command select-input-method is now called set-input-method.
4200
4201In the language environment "Korean", you can use the following
4202keys:
4203 Shift-SPC toggle-korean-input-method
4204 C-F9 quail-hangul-switch-symbol-ksc
4205 F9 quail-hangul-switch-hanja
4206These key bindings are canceled when you switch to another language
4207environment.
4208
4209** The minibuffer history of file names now records the specified file
4210names, not the entire minibuffer input. For example, if the
4211minibuffer starts out with /usr/foo/, you might type in /etc/passwd to
4212get
4213
4214 /usr/foo//etc/passwd
4215
4216which stands for the file /etc/passwd.
4217
4218Formerly, this used to put /usr/foo//etc/passwd in the history list.
4219Now this puts just /etc/passwd in the history list.
4220
4221** If you are root, Emacs sets backup-by-copying-when-mismatch to t
4222at startup, so that saving a file will be sure to preserve
4223its owner and group.
4224
4225** find-func.el can now also find the place of definition of Emacs
4226Lisp variables in user-loaded libraries.
4227
4228** C-x r t (string-rectangle) now deletes the existing rectangle
4229contents before inserting the specified string on each line.
4230
4231** There is a new command delete-whitespace-rectangle
4232which deletes whitespace starting from a particular column
4233in all the lines on a rectangle. The column is specified
4234by the left edge of the rectangle.
4235
4236** You can now store a number into a register with C-u NUMBER C-x r n REG,
4237increment it by INC with C-u INC C-x r + REG (to increment by one, omit
4238C-u INC), and insert it in the buffer with C-x r g REG. This is useful
4239for writing keyboard macros.
4240
4241** The new command M-x speedbar displays a frame in which directories,
4242files, and tags can be displayed, manipulated, and jumped to. The
4243frame defaults to 20 characters in width, and is the same height as
4244the frame that it was started from. Some major modes define
4245additional commands for the speedbar, including Rmail, GUD/GDB, and
4246info.
4247
4248** query-replace-regexp is now bound to C-M-%.
4249
4250** In Transient Mark mode, when the region is active, M-x
4251query-replace and the other replace commands now operate on the region
4252contents only.
4253
4254** M-x write-region, when used interactively, now asks for
4255confirmation before overwriting an existing file. When you call
4256the function from a Lisp program, a new optional argument CONFIRM
4257says whether to ask for confirmation in this case.
4258
4259** If you use find-file-literally and the file is already visited
4260non-literally, the command asks you whether to revisit the file
4261literally. If you say no, it signals an error.
4262
4263** Major modes defined with the "derived mode" feature
4264now use the proper name for the mode hook: WHATEVER-mode-hook.
4265Formerly they used the name WHATEVER-mode-hooks, but that is
4266inconsistent with Emacs conventions.
4267
4268** shell-command-on-region (and shell-command) reports success or
4269failure if the command produces no output.
4270
4271** Set focus-follows-mouse to nil if your window system or window
4272manager does not transfer focus to another window when you just move
4273the mouse.
4274
4275** mouse-menu-buffer-maxlen has been renamed to
4276mouse-buffer-menu-maxlen to be consistent with the other related
4277function and variable names.
4278
4279** The new variable auto-coding-alist specifies coding systems for
4280reading specific files. This has higher priority than
4281file-coding-system-alist.
4282
4283** If you set the variable unibyte-display-via-language-environment to
4284t, then Emacs displays non-ASCII characters are displayed by
4285converting them to the equivalent multibyte characters according to
4286the current language environment. As a result, they are displayed
4287according to the current fontset.
4288
4289** C-q's handling of codes in the range 0200 through 0377 is changed.
4290
4291The codes in the range 0200 through 0237 are inserted as one byte of
4292that code regardless of the values of nonascii-translation-table and
4293nonascii-insert-offset.
4294
4295For the codes in the range 0240 through 0377, if
4296enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil and nonascii-translation-table
4297nor nonascii-insert-offset can't convert them to valid multibyte
4298characters, they are converted to Latin-1 characters.
4299
4300** If you try to find a file that is not read-accessible, you now get
4301an error, rather than an empty buffer and a warning.
4302
4303** In the minibuffer history commands M-r and M-s, an upper case
4304letter in the regular expression forces case-sensitive search.
4305
4306** In the *Help* buffer, cross-references to commands and variables
4307are inferred and hyperlinked. Use C-h m in Help mode for the relevant
4308command keys.
4309
4310** M-x apropos-command, with a prefix argument, no longer looks for
4311user option variables--instead it looks for noninteractive functions.
4312
4313Meanwhile, the command apropos-variable normally searches for
4314user option variables; with a prefix argument, it looks at
4315all variables that have documentation.
4316
4317** When you type a long line in the minibuffer, and the minibuffer
4318shows just one line, automatically scrolling works in a special way
4319that shows you overlap with the previous line of text. The variable
4320minibuffer-scroll-overlap controls how many characters of overlap
4321it should show; the default is 20.
4322
4323Meanwhile, Resize Minibuffer mode is still available; in that mode,
4324the minibuffer grows taller (up to a point) as needed to show the whole
4325of your input.
4326
4327** The new command M-x customize-changed-options lets you customize
4328all the options whose meanings or default values have changed in
4329recent Emacs versions. You specify a previous Emacs version number as
4330argument, and the command creates a customization buffer showing all
4331the customizable options which were changed since that version.
4332Newly added options are included as well.
4333
4334If you don't specify a particular version number argument,
4335then the customization buffer shows all the customizable options
4336for which Emacs versions of changes are recorded.
4337
4338This function is also bound to the Changed Options entry in the
4339Customize menu.
4340
4341** When you run M-x grep with a prefix argument, it figures out
4342the tag around point and puts that into the default grep command.
4343
4344** The new command M-* (pop-tag-mark) pops back through a history of
4345buffer positions from which M-. or other tag-finding commands were
4346invoked.
4347
4348** The new variable comment-padding specifies the number of spaces
4349that `comment-region' will insert before the actual text of the comment.
4350The default is 1.
4351
4352** In Fortran mode the characters `.', `_' and `$' now have symbol
4353syntax, not word syntax. Fortran mode now supports `imenu' and has
4354new commands fortran-join-line (M-^) and fortran-narrow-to-subprogram
4355(C-x n d). M-q can be used to fill a statement or comment block
4356sensibly.
4357
4358** GUD now supports jdb, the Java debugger, and pdb, the Python debugger.
4359
4360** If you set the variable add-log-keep-changes-together to a non-nil
4361value, the command `C-x 4 a' will automatically notice when you make
4362two entries in one day for one file, and combine them.
4363
4364** You can use the command M-x diary-mail-entries to mail yourself a
4365reminder about upcoming diary entries. See the documentation string
4366for a sample shell script for calling this function automatically
4367every night.
4368
4369** Desktop changes
4370
4371*** All you need to do to enable use of the Desktop package, is to set
4372the variable desktop-enable to t with Custom.
4373
4374*** Minor modes are now restored. Which minor modes are restored
4375and how modes are restored is controlled by `desktop-minor-mode-table'.
4376
4377** There is no need to do anything special, now, to enable Gnus to
4378read and post multi-lingual articles.
4379
4380** Outline mode has now support for showing hidden outlines when
4381doing an isearch. In order for this to happen search-invisible should
4382be set to open (the default). If an isearch match is inside a hidden
4383outline the outline is made visible. If you continue pressing C-s and
4384the match moves outside the formerly invisible outline, the outline is
4385made invisible again.
4386
4387** Mail reading and sending changes
4388
4389*** The Rmail e command now switches to displaying the whole header of
4390the message before it lets you edit the message. This is so that any
4391changes you make in the header will not be lost if you subsequently
4392toggle.
4393
4394*** The w command in Rmail, which writes the message body into a file,
4395now works in the summary buffer as well. (The command to delete the
4396summary buffer is now Q.) The default file name for the w command, if
4397the message has no subject, is stored in the variable
4398rmail-default-body-file.
4399
4400*** Most of the commands and modes that operate on mail and netnews no
4401longer depend on the value of mail-header-separator. Instead, they
4402handle whatever separator the buffer happens to use.
4403
4404*** If you set mail-signature to a value which is not t, nil, or a string,
4405it should be an expression. When you send a message, this expression
4406is evaluated to insert the signature.
4407
4408*** The new Lisp library feedmail.el (version 8) enhances processing of
4409outbound email messages. It works in coordination with other email
4410handling packages (e.g., rmail, VM, gnus) and is responsible for
4411putting final touches on messages and actually submitting them for
4412transmission. Users of the emacs program "fakemail" might be
4413especially interested in trying feedmail.
4414
4415feedmail is not enabled by default. See comments at the top of
4416feedmail.el for set-up instructions. Among the bigger features
4417provided by feedmail are:
4418
4419**** you can park outgoing messages into a disk-based queue and
4420stimulate sending some or all of them later (handy for laptop users);
4421there is also a queue for draft messages
4422
4423**** you can get one last look at the prepped outbound message and
4424be prompted for confirmation
4425
4426**** does smart filling of address headers
4427
4428**** can generate a MESSAGE-ID: line and a DATE: line; the date can be
4429the time the message was written or the time it is being sent; this
4430can make FCC copies more closely resemble copies that recipients get
4431
4432**** you can specify an arbitrary function for actually transmitting
4433the message; included in feedmail are interfaces for /bin/[r]mail,
4434/usr/lib/sendmail, and elisp smtpmail; it's easy to write a new
4435function for something else (10-20 lines of elisp)
4436
4437** Dired changes
4438
4439*** The Dired function dired-do-toggle, which toggles marked and unmarked
4440files, is now bound to "t" instead of "T".
4441
4442*** dired-at-point has been added to ffap.el. It allows one to easily
4443run Dired on the directory name at point.
4444
4445*** Dired has a new command: %g. It searches the contents of
4446files in the directory and marks each file that contains a match
4447for a specified regexp.
4448
4449** VC Changes
4450
4451*** New option vc-ignore-vc-files lets you turn off version control
4452conveniently.
4453
4454*** VC Dired has been completely rewritten. It is now much
4455faster, especially for CVS, and works very similar to ordinary
4456Dired.
4457
4458VC Dired is invoked by typing C-x v d and entering the name of the
4459directory to display. By default, VC Dired gives you a recursive
4460listing of all files at or below the given directory which are
4461currently locked (for CVS, all files not up-to-date are shown).
4462
4463You can change the listing format by setting vc-dired-recurse to nil,
4464then it shows only the given directory, and you may also set
4465vc-dired-terse-display to nil, then it shows all files under version
4466control plus the names of any subdirectories, so that you can type `i'
4467on such lines to insert them manually, as in ordinary Dired.
4468
4469All Dired commands operate normally in VC Dired, except for `v', which
4470is redefined as the version control prefix. That means you may type
4471`v l', `v =' etc. to invoke `vc-print-log', `vc-diff' and the like on
4472the file named in the current Dired buffer line. `v v' invokes
4473`vc-next-action' on this file, or on all files currently marked.
4474
4475The new command `v t' (vc-dired-toggle-terse-mode) allows you to
4476toggle between terse display (only locked files) and full display (all
4477VC files plus subdirectories). There is also a special command,
4478`* l', to mark all files currently locked.
4479
4480Giving a prefix argument to C-x v d now does the same thing as in
4481ordinary Dired: it allows you to supply additional options for the ls
4482command in the minibuffer, to fine-tune VC Dired's output.
4483
4484*** Under CVS, if you merge changes from the repository into a working
4485file, and CVS detects conflicts, VC now offers to start an ediff
4486session to resolve them.
4487
4488Alternatively, you can use the new command `vc-resolve-conflicts' to
4489resolve conflicts in a file at any time. It works in any buffer that
4490contains conflict markers as generated by rcsmerge (which is what CVS
4491uses as well).
4492
4493*** You can now transfer changes between branches, using the new
4494command vc-merge (C-x v m). It is implemented for RCS and CVS. When
4495you invoke it in a buffer under version-control, you can specify
4496either an entire branch or a pair of versions, and the changes on that
4497branch or between the two versions are merged into the working file.
4498If this results in any conflicts, they may be resolved interactively,
4499using ediff.
4500
4501** Changes in Font Lock
4502
4503*** The face and variable previously known as font-lock-reference-face
4504are now called font-lock-constant-face to better reflect their typical
4505use for highlighting constants and labels. (Its face properties are
4506unchanged.) The variable font-lock-reference-face remains for now for
4507compatibility reasons, but its value is font-lock-constant-face.
4508
4509** Frame name display changes
4510
4511*** The command set-frame-name lets you set the name of the current
4512frame. You can use the new command select-frame-by-name to select and
4513raise a frame; this is mostly useful on character-only terminals, or
4514when many frames are invisible or iconified.
4515
4516*** On character-only terminal (not a window system), changing the
4517frame name is now reflected on the mode line and in the Buffers/Frames
4518menu.
4519
4520** Comint (subshell) changes
4521
4522*** In Comint modes, the commands to kill, stop or interrupt a
4523subjob now also kill pending input. This is for compatibility
4524with ordinary shells, where the signal characters do this.
4525
4526*** There are new commands in Comint mode.
4527
4528C-c C-x fetches the "next" line from the input history;
4529that is, the line after the last line you got.
4530You can use this command to fetch successive lines, one by one.
4531
4532C-c SPC accumulates lines of input. More precisely, it arranges to
4533send the current line together with the following line, when you send
4534the following line.
4535
4536C-c C-a if repeated twice consecutively now moves to the process mark,
4537which separates the pending input from the subprocess output and the
4538previously sent input.
4539
4540C-c M-r now runs comint-previous-matching-input-from-input;
4541it searches for a previous command, using the current pending input
4542as the search string.
4543
4544*** New option compilation-scroll-output can be set to scroll
4545automatically in compilation-mode windows.
4546
4547** C mode changes
4548
4549*** Multiline macros are now handled, both as they affect indentation,
4550and as recognized syntax. New syntactic symbol cpp-macro-cont is
4551assigned to second and subsequent lines of a multiline macro
4552definition.
4553
4554*** A new style "user" which captures all non-hook-ified
4555(i.e. top-level) .emacs file variable settings and customizations.
4556Style "cc-mode" is an alias for "user" and is deprecated. "gnu"
4557style is still the default however.
4558
4559*** "java" style now conforms to Sun's JDK coding style.
4560
4561*** There are new commands c-beginning-of-defun, c-end-of-defun which
4562are alternatives which you could bind to C-M-a and C-M-e if you prefer
4563them. They do not have key bindings by default.
4564
4565*** New and improved implementations of M-a (c-beginning-of-statement)
4566and M-e (c-end-of-statement).
4567
4568*** C++ namespace blocks are supported, with new syntactic symbols
4569namespace-open, namespace-close, and innamespace.
4570
4571*** File local variable settings of c-file-style and c-file-offsets
4572makes the style variables local to that buffer only.
4573
4574*** New indentation functions c-lineup-close-paren,
4575c-indent-one-line-block, c-lineup-dont-change.
4576
4577*** Improvements (hopefully!) to the way CC Mode is loaded. You
4578should now be able to do a (require 'cc-mode) to get the entire
4579package loaded properly for customization in your .emacs file. A new
4580variable c-initialize-on-load controls this and is t by default.
4581
4582** Changes to hippie-expand.
4583
4584*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-skip-space'. If
4585non-nil, trailing spaces may be included in the abbreviation to search for,
4586which then gives the same behavior as the original `dabbrev-expand'.
4587
4588*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-as-symbol'. If
4589non-nil, characters of syntax '_' is considered part of the word when
4590expanding dynamically.
4591
4592*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-no-restriction'. If
4593non-nil, narrowed buffers are widened before they are searched.
4594
4595*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-only-buffers'. If
4596non-empty, buffers searched are restricted to the types specified in
4597this list. Useful for example when constructing new special-purpose
4598expansion functions with `make-hippie-expand-function'.
4599
4600*** Text properties of the expansion are no longer copied.
4601
4602** Changes in BibTeX mode.
4603
4604*** Any titleword matching a regexp in the new variable
4605bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore (case sensitive) is ignored during
4606automatic key generation. This replaces variable
4607bibtex-autokey-titleword-first-ignore, which only checked for matches
4608against the first word in the title.
4609
4610*** Autokey generation now uses all words from the title, not just
4611capitalized words. To avoid conflicts with existing customizations,
4612bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore is set up such that words starting with
4613lowerkey characters will still be ignored. Thus, if you want to use
4614lowercase words from the title, you will have to overwrite the
4615bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore standard setting.
4616
4617*** Case conversion of names and title words for automatic key
4618generation is more flexible. Variable bibtex-autokey-preserve-case is
4619replaced by bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert and
4620bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert.
4621
4622** Changes in vcursor.el.
4623
4624*** Support for character terminals is available: there is a new keymap
4625and the vcursor will appear as an arrow between buffer text. A
4626variable `vcursor-interpret-input' allows input from the vcursor to be
4627entered exactly as if typed. Numerous functions, including
4628`vcursor-compare-windows', have been rewritten to improve consistency
4629in the selection of windows and corresponding keymaps.
4630
4631*** vcursor options can now be altered with M-x customize under the
4632Editing group once the package is loaded.
4633
4634*** Loading vcursor now does not define keys by default, as this is
4635generally a bad side effect. Use M-x customize to set
4636vcursor-key-bindings to t to restore the old behaviour.
4637
4638*** vcursor-auto-disable can be `copy', which turns off copying from the
4639vcursor, but doesn't disable it, after any non-vcursor command.
4640
4641** Ispell changes.
4642
4643*** You can now spell check comments and strings in the current
4644buffer with M-x ispell-comments-and-strings. Comments and strings
4645are identified by syntax tables in effect.
4646
4647*** Generic region skipping implemented.
4648A single buffer can be broken into a number of regions where text will
4649and will not be checked. The definitions of the regions can be user
4650defined. New applications and improvements made available by this
4651include:
4652
4653 o URLs are automatically skipped
4654 o EMail message checking is vastly improved.
4655
4656*** Ispell can highlight the erroneous word even on non-window terminals.
4657
4658** Changes to RefTeX mode
4659
4660RefTeX has been updated in order to make it more usable with very
4661large projects (like a several volume math book). The parser has been
4662re-written from scratch. To get maximum speed from RefTeX, check the
4663section `Optimizations' in the manual.
4664
4665*** New recursive parser.
4666
4667The old version of RefTeX created a single large buffer containing the
4668entire multifile document in order to parse the document. The new
4669recursive parser scans the individual files.
4670
4671*** Parsing only part of a document.
4672
4673Reparsing of changed document parts can now be made faster by enabling
4674partial scans. To use this feature, read the documentation string of
4675the variable `reftex-enable-partial-scans' and set the variable to t.
4676
4677 (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t)
4678
4679*** Storing parsing information in a file.
4680
4681This can improve startup times considerably. To turn it on, use
4682
4683 (setq reftex-save-parse-info t)
4684
4685*** Using multiple selection buffers
4686
4687If the creation of label selection buffers is too slow (this happens
4688for large documents), you can reuse these buffers by setting
4689
4690 (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t)
4691
4692*** References to external documents.
4693
4694The LaTeX package `xr' allows to cross-reference labels in external
4695documents. RefTeX can provide information about the external
4696documents as well. To use this feature, set up the \externaldocument
4697macros required by the `xr' package and rescan the document with
4698RefTeX. The external labels can then be accessed with the `x' key in
4699the selection buffer provided by `reftex-reference' (bound to `C-c )').
4700The `x' key also works in the table of contents buffer.
4701
4702*** Many more labeled LaTeX environments are recognized by default.
4703
4704The builtin command list now covers all the standard LaTeX commands,
4705and all of the major packages included in the LaTeX distribution.
4706
4707Also, RefTeX now understands the \appendix macro and changes
4708the enumeration of sections in the *toc* buffer accordingly.
4709
4710*** Mouse support for selection and *toc* buffers
4711
4712The mouse can now be used to select items in the selection and *toc*
4713buffers. See also the new option `reftex-highlight-selection'.
4714
4715*** New keymaps for selection and table of contents modes.
4716
4717The selection processes for labels and citation keys, and the table of
4718contents buffer now have their own keymaps: `reftex-select-label-map',
4719`reftex-select-bib-map', `reftex-toc-map'. The selection processes
4720have a number of new keys predefined. In particular, TAB lets you
4721enter a label with completion. Check the on-the-fly help (press `?'
4722at the selection prompt) or read the Info documentation to find out
4723more.
4724
4725*** Support for the varioref package
4726
4727The `v' key in the label selection buffer toggles \ref versus \vref.
4728
4729*** New hooks
4730
4731Three new hooks can be used to redefine the way labels, references,
4732and citations are created. These hooks are
4733`reftex-format-label-function', `reftex-format-ref-function',
4734`reftex-format-cite-function'.
4735
4736*** Citations outside LaTeX
4737
4738The command `reftex-citation' may also be used outside LaTeX (e.g. in
4739a mail buffer). See the Info documentation for details.
4740
4741*** Short context is no longer fontified.
4742
4743The short context in the label menu no longer copies the
4744fontification from the text in the buffer. If you prefer it to be
4745fontified, use
4746
4747 (setq reftex-refontify-context t)
4748
4749** file-cache-minibuffer-complete now accepts a prefix argument.
4750With a prefix argument, it does not try to do completion of
4751the file name within its directory; it only checks for other
4752directories that contain the same file name.
4753
4754Thus, given the file name Makefile, and assuming that a file
4755Makefile.in exists in the same directory, ordinary
4756file-cache-minibuffer-complete will try to complete Makefile to
4757Makefile.in and will therefore never look for other directories that
4758have Makefile. A prefix argument tells it not to look for longer
4759names such as Makefile.in, so that instead it will look for other
4760directories--just as if the name were already complete in its present
4761directory.
4762
4763** New modes and packages
4764
4765*** There is a new alternative major mode for Perl, Cperl mode.
4766It has many more features than Perl mode, and some people prefer
4767it, but some do not.
4768
4769*** There is a new major mode, M-x vhdl-mode, for editing files of VHDL
4770code.
4771
4772*** M-x which-function-mode enables a minor mode that displays the
4773current function name continuously in the mode line, as you move
4774around in a buffer.
4775
4776Which Function mode is effective in major modes which support Imenu.
4777
4778*** Gametree is a major mode for editing game analysis trees. The author
4779uses it for keeping notes about his postal Chess games, but it should
4780be helpful for other two-player games as well, as long as they have an
4781established system of notation similar to Chess.
4782
4783*** The new minor mode checkdoc-minor-mode provides Emacs Lisp
4784documentation string checking for style and spelling. The style
4785guidelines are found in the Emacs Lisp programming manual.
4786
4787*** The net-utils package makes some common networking features
4788available in Emacs. Some of these functions are wrappers around
4789system utilities (ping, nslookup, etc); others are implementations of
4790simple protocols (finger, whois) in Emacs Lisp. There are also
4791functions to make simple connections to TCP/IP ports for debugging and
4792the like.
4793
4794*** highlight-changes-mode is a minor mode that uses colors to
4795identify recently changed parts of the buffer text.
4796
4797*** The new package `midnight' lets you specify things to be done
4798within Emacs at midnight--by default, kill buffers that you have not
4799used in a considerable time. To use this feature, customize
4800the user option `midnight-mode' to t.
4801
4802*** The file generic-x.el defines a number of simple major modes.
4803
4804 apache-generic-mode: For Apache and NCSA httpd configuration files
4805 samba-generic-mode: Samba configuration files
4806 fvwm-generic-mode: For fvwm initialization files
4807 x-resource-generic-mode: For X resource files
4808 hosts-generic-mode: For hosts files (.rhosts, /etc/hosts, etc)
4809 mailagent-rules-generic-mode: For mailagent .rules files
4810 javascript-generic-mode: For JavaScript files
4811 vrml-generic-mode: For VRML files
4812 java-manifest-generic-mode: For Java MANIFEST files
4813 java-properties-generic-mode: For Java property files
4814 mailrc-generic-mode: For .mailrc files
4815
4816 Platform-specific modes:
4817
4818 prototype-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V prototype files
4819 pkginfo-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V pkginfo files
4820 alias-generic-mode: For C shell alias files
4821 inf-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INF files
4822 ini-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INI files
4823 reg-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Registry files
4824 bat-generic-mode: For MS-Windows BAT scripts
4825 rc-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Resource files
4826 rul-generic-mode: For InstallShield scripts
4827\f
4828* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 since the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
4829
4830** If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode,
4831use -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line.
4832That will force Emacs to read that file in unibyte mode.
4833Otherwise, the file will be loaded and byte-compiled in multibyte mode.
4834
4835Thus, each lisp file is read in a consistent way regardless of whether
4836you started Emacs with --unibyte, so that a Lisp program gives
4837consistent results regardless of how Emacs was started.
4838
4839** The new function assoc-default is useful for searching an alist,
4840and using a default value if the key is not found there. You can
4841specify a comparison predicate, so this function is useful for
4842searching comparing a string against an alist of regular expressions.
4843
4844** The functions unibyte-char-to-multibyte and
4845multibyte-char-to-unibyte convert between unibyte and multibyte
4846character codes, in a way that is appropriate for the current language
4847environment.
4848
4849** The functions read-event, read-char and read-char-exclusive now
4850take two optional arguments. PROMPT, if non-nil, specifies a prompt
4851string. SUPPRESS-INPUT-METHOD, if non-nil, says to disable the
4852current input method for reading this one event.
4853
4854** Two new variables print-escape-nonascii and print-escape-multibyte
4855now control whether to output certain characters as
4856backslash-sequences. print-escape-nonascii applies to single-byte
4857non-ASCII characters; print-escape-multibyte applies to multibyte
4858characters. Both of these variables are used only when printing
4859in readable fashion (prin1 uses them, princ does not).
4860\f
4861* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 before the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
4862
4863** Compiled Emacs Lisp files made with the modified "MBSK" version
4864of Emacs 20.2 do not work in Emacs 20.3.
4865
4866** Buffer positions are now measured in characters, as they were
4867in Emacs 19 and before. This means that (forward-char 1)
4868always increases point by 1.
4869
4870The function chars-in-region now just subtracts its arguments. It is
4871considered obsolete. The function char-boundary-p has been deleted.
4872
4873See below for additional changes relating to multibyte characters.
4874
4875** defcustom, defface and defgroup now accept the keyword `:version'.
4876Use this to specify in which version of Emacs a certain variable's
4877default value changed. For example,
4878
4879 (defcustom foo-max 34 "*Maximum number of foo's allowed."
4880 :type 'integer
4881 :group 'foo
4882 :version "20.3")
4883
4884 (defgroup foo-group nil "The foo group."
4885 :version "20.3")
4886
4887If an entire new group is added or the variables in it have the
4888default values changed, then just add a `:version' to that group. It
4889is recommended that new packages added to the distribution contain a
4890`:version' in the top level group.
4891
4892This information is used to control the customize-changed-options command.
4893
4894** It is now an error to change the value of a symbol whose name
4895starts with a colon--if it is interned in the standard obarray.
4896
4897However, setting such a symbol to its proper value, which is that
4898symbol itself, is not an error. This is for the sake of programs that
4899support previous Emacs versions by explicitly setting these variables
4900to themselves.
4901
4902If you set the variable keyword-symbols-constant-flag to nil,
4903this error is suppressed, and you can set these symbols to any
4904values whatever.
4905
4906** There is a new debugger command, R.
4907It evaluates an expression like e, but saves the result
4908in the buffer *Debugger-record*.
4909
4910** Frame-local variables.
4911
4912You can now make a variable local to various frames. To do this, call
4913the function make-variable-frame-local; this enables frames to have
4914local bindings for that variable.
4915
4916These frame-local bindings are actually frame parameters: you create a
4917frame-local binding in a specific frame by calling
4918modify-frame-parameters and specifying the variable name as the
4919parameter name.
4920
4921Buffer-local bindings take precedence over frame-local bindings.
4922Thus, if the current buffer has a buffer-local binding, that binding is
4923active; otherwise, if the selected frame has a frame-local binding,
4924that binding is active; otherwise, the default binding is active.
4925
4926It would not be hard to implement window-local bindings, but it is not
4927clear that this would be very useful; windows tend to come and go in a
4928very transitory fashion, so that trying to produce any specific effect
4929through a window-local binding would not be very robust.
4930
4931** `sregexq' and `sregex' are two new functions for constructing
4932"symbolic regular expressions." These are Lisp expressions that, when
4933evaluated, yield conventional string-based regexps. The symbolic form
4934makes it easier to construct, read, and maintain complex patterns.
4935See the documentation in sregex.el.
4936
4937** parse-partial-sexp's return value has an additional element which
4938is used to pass information along if you pass it to another call to
4939parse-partial-sexp, starting its scan where the first call ended.
4940The contents of this field are not yet finalized.
4941
4942** eval-region now accepts a fourth optional argument READ-FUNCTION.
4943If it is non-nil, that function is used instead of `read'.
4944
4945** unload-feature by default removes the feature's functions from
4946known hooks to avoid trouble, but a package providing FEATURE can
4947define a hook FEATURE-unload-hook to be run by unload-feature instead.
4948
4949** read-from-minibuffer no longer returns the argument DEFAULT-VALUE
4950when the user enters empty input. It now returns the null string, as
4951it did in Emacs 19. The default value is made available in the
4952history via M-n, but it is not applied here as a default.
4953
4954The other, more specialized minibuffer-reading functions continue to
4955return the default value (not the null string) when the user enters
4956empty input.
4957
4958** The new variable read-buffer-function controls which routine to use
4959for selecting buffers. For example, if you set this variable to
4960`iswitchb-read-buffer', iswitchb will be used to read buffer names.
4961Other functions can also be used if they accept the same arguments as
4962`read-buffer' and return the selected buffer name as a string.
4963
4964** The new function read-passwd reads a password from the terminal,
4965echoing a period for each character typed. It takes three arguments:
4966a prompt string, a flag which says "read it twice to make sure", and a
4967default password to use if the user enters nothing.
4968
4969** The variable fill-nobreak-predicate gives major modes a way to
4970specify not to break a line at certain places. Its value is a
4971function which is called with no arguments, with point located at the
4972place where a break is being considered. If the function returns
4973non-nil, then the line won't be broken there.
4974
4975** window-end now takes an optional second argument, UPDATE.
4976If this is non-nil, then the function always returns an accurate
4977up-to-date value for the buffer position corresponding to the
4978end of the window, even if this requires computation.
4979
4980** other-buffer now takes an optional argument FRAME
4981which specifies which frame's buffer list to use.
4982If it is nil, that means use the selected frame's buffer list.
4983
4984** The new variable buffer-display-time, always local in every buffer,
4985holds the value of (current-time) as of the last time that a window
4986was directed to display this buffer.
4987
4988** It is now meaningful to compare two window-configuration objects
4989with `equal'. Two window-configuration objects are equal if they
4990describe equivalent arrangements of windows, in the same frame--in
4991other words, if they would give the same results if passed to
4992set-window-configuration.
4993
4994** compare-window-configurations is a new function that compares two
4995window configurations loosely. It ignores differences in saved buffer
4996positions and scrolling, and considers only the structure and sizes of
4997windows and the choice of buffers to display.
4998
4999** The variable minor-mode-overriding-map-alist allows major modes to
5000override the key bindings of a minor mode. The elements of this alist
5001look like the elements of minor-mode-map-alist: (VARIABLE . KEYMAP).
5002
5003If the VARIABLE in an element of minor-mode-overriding-map-alist has a
5004non-nil value, the paired KEYMAP is active, and totally overrides the
5005map (if any) specified for the same variable in minor-mode-map-alist.
5006
5007minor-mode-overriding-map-alist is automatically local in all buffers,
5008and it is meant to be set by major modes.
5009
5010** The function match-string-no-properties is like match-string
5011except that it discards all text properties from the result.
5012
5013** The function load-average now accepts an optional argument
5014USE-FLOATS. If it is non-nil, the load average values are returned as
5015floating point numbers, rather than as integers to be divided by 100.
5016
5017** The new variable temporary-file-directory specifies the directory
5018to use for creating temporary files. The default value is determined
5019in a reasonable way for your operating system; on GNU and Unix systems
5020it is based on the TMP and TMPDIR environment variables.
5021
5022** Menu changes
5023
5024*** easymenu.el now uses the new menu item format and supports the
5025keywords :visible and :filter. The existing keyword :keys is now
5026better supported.
5027
5028The variable `easy-menu-precalculate-equivalent-keybindings' controls
5029a new feature which calculates keyboard equivalents for the menu when
5030you define the menu. The default is t. If you rarely use menus, you
5031can set the variable to nil to disable this precalculation feature;
5032then the calculation is done only if you use the menu bar.
5033
5034*** A new format for menu items is supported.
5035
5036In a keymap, a key binding that has the format
5037 (STRING . REAL-BINDING) or (STRING HELP-STRING . REAL-BINDING)
5038defines a menu item. Now a menu item definition may also be a list that
5039starts with the symbol `menu-item'.
5040
5041The format is:
5042 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) or
5043 (menu-item ITEM-NAME REAL-BINDING . ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST)
5044where ITEM-NAME is an expression which evaluates to the menu item
5045string, and ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST has the form of a property list.
5046The supported properties include
5047
5048:enable FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
5049 item is enabled.
5050:visible FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
5051 item should appear in the menu.
5052:filter FILTER-FN
5053 FILTER-FN is a function of one argument,
5054 which will be REAL-BINDING.
5055 It should return a binding to use instead.
5056:keys DESCRIPTION
5057 DESCRIPTION is a string that describes an equivalent keyboard
5058 binding for for REAL-BINDING. DESCRIPTION is expanded with
5059 `substitute-command-keys' before it is used.
5060:key-sequence KEY-SEQUENCE
5061 KEY-SEQUENCE is a key-sequence for an equivalent
5062 keyboard binding.
5063:key-sequence nil
5064 This means that the command normally has no
5065 keyboard equivalent.
5066:help HELP HELP is the extra help string (not currently used).
5067:button (TYPE . SELECTED)
5068 TYPE is :toggle or :radio.
5069 SELECTED is a form, to be evaluated, and its
5070 value says whether this button is currently selected.
5071
5072Buttons are at the moment only simulated by prefixes in the menu.
5073Eventually ordinary X-buttons may be supported.
5074
5075(menu-item ITEM-NAME) defines unselectable item.
5076
5077** New event types
5078
5079*** The new event type `mouse-wheel' is generated by a wheel on a
5080mouse (such as the MS Intellimouse). The event contains a delta that
5081corresponds to the amount and direction that the wheel is rotated,
5082which is typically used to implement a scroll or zoom. The format is:
5083
5084 (mouse-wheel POSITION DELTA)
5085
5086where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
5087same format as a mouse-click event, and DELTA is a signed number
5088indicating the number of increments by which the wheel was rotated. A
5089negative DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated backwards, towards
5090the user, and a positive DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated
5091forward, away from the user.
5092
5093As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
5094
5095*** The new event type `drag-n-drop' is generated when a group of
5096files is selected in an application outside of Emacs, and then dragged
5097and dropped onto an Emacs frame. The event contains a list of
5098filenames that were dragged and dropped, which are then typically
5099loaded into Emacs. The format is:
5100
5101 (drag-n-drop POSITION FILES)
5102
5103where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
5104same format as a mouse-click event, and FILES is the list of filenames
5105that were dragged and dropped.
5106
5107As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
5108
5109** Changes relating to multibyte characters.
5110
5111*** The variable enable-multibyte-characters is now read-only;
5112any attempt to set it directly signals an error. The only way
5113to change this value in an existing buffer is with set-buffer-multibyte.
5114
5115*** In a string constant, `\ ' now stands for "nothing at all". You
5116can use it to terminate a hex escape which is followed by a character
5117that could otherwise be read as part of the hex escape.
5118
5119*** String indices are now measured in characters, as they were
5120in Emacs 19 and before.
5121
5122The function chars-in-string has been deleted.
5123The function concat-chars has been renamed to `string'.
5124
5125*** The function set-buffer-multibyte sets the flag in the current
5126buffer that says whether the buffer uses multibyte representation or
5127unibyte representation. If the argument is nil, it selects unibyte
5128representation. Otherwise it selects multibyte representation.
5129
5130This function does not change the contents of the buffer, viewed
5131as a sequence of bytes. However, it does change the contents
5132viewed as characters; a sequence of two bytes which is treated as
5133one character when the buffer uses multibyte representation
5134will count as two characters using unibyte representation.
5135
5136This function sets enable-multibyte-characters to record which
5137representation is in use. It also adjusts various data in the buffer
5138(including its markers, overlays and text properties) so that they are
5139consistent with the new representation.
5140
5141*** string-make-multibyte takes a string and converts it to multibyte
5142representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care
5143about the representation, because Emacs converts when necessary;
5144however, it makes a difference when you compare strings.
5145
5146The conversion of non-ASCII characters works by adding the value of
5147nonascii-insert-offset to each character, or by translating them
5148using the table nonascii-translation-table.
5149
5150*** string-make-unibyte takes a string and converts it to unibyte
5151representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care about the
5152representation, but it makes a difference when you compare strings.
5153
5154The conversion from multibyte to unibyte representation
5155loses information; the only time Emacs performs it automatically
5156is when inserting a multibyte string into a unibyte buffer.
5157
5158*** string-as-multibyte takes a string, and returns another string
5159which contains the same bytes, but treats them as multibyte.
5160
5161*** string-as-unibyte takes a string, and returns another string
5162which contains the same bytes, but treats them as unibyte.
5163
5164*** The new function compare-strings lets you compare
5165portions of two strings. Unibyte strings are converted to multibyte,
5166so that a unibyte string can match a multibyte string.
5167You can specify whether to ignore case or not.
5168
5169*** assoc-ignore-case now uses compare-strings so that
5170it can treat unibyte and multibyte strings as equal.
5171
5172*** Regular expression operations and buffer string searches now
5173convert the search pattern to multibyte or unibyte to accord with the
5174buffer or string being searched.
5175
5176One consequence is that you cannot always use \200-\377 inside of
5177[...] to match all non-ASCII characters. This does still work when
5178searching or matching a unibyte buffer or string, but not when
5179searching or matching a multibyte string. Unfortunately, there is no
5180obvious choice of syntax to use within [...] for that job. But, what
5181you want is just to match all non-ASCII characters, the regular
5182expression [^\0-\177] works for it.
5183
5184*** Structure of coding system changed.
5185
5186All coding systems (including aliases and subsidiaries) are named
5187by symbols; the symbol's `coding-system' property is a vector
5188which defines the coding system. Aliases share the same vector
5189as the principal name, so that altering the contents of this
5190vector affects the principal name and its aliases. You can define
5191your own alias name of a coding system by the function
5192define-coding-system-alias.
5193
5194The coding system definition includes a property list of its own. Use
5195the new functions `coding-system-get' and `coding-system-put' to
5196access such coding system properties as post-read-conversion,
5197pre-write-conversion, character-translation-table-for-decode,
5198character-translation-table-for-encode, mime-charset, and
5199safe-charsets. For instance, (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1
5200'mime-charset) gives the corresponding MIME-charset parameter
5201`iso-8859-1'.
5202
5203Among the coding system properties listed above, safe-charsets is new.
5204The value of this property is a list of character sets which this
5205coding system can correctly encode and decode. For instance:
5206(coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 'safe-charsets) => (ascii latin-iso8859-1)
5207
5208Here, "correctly encode" means that the encoded character sets can
5209also be handled safely by systems other than Emacs as far as they
5210are capable of that coding system. Though, Emacs itself can encode
5211the other character sets and read it back correctly.
5212
5213*** The new function select-safe-coding-system can be used to find a
5214proper coding system for encoding the specified region or string.
5215This function requires a user interaction.
5216
5217*** The new functions find-coding-systems-region and
5218find-coding-systems-string are helper functions used by
5219select-safe-coding-system. They return a list of all proper coding
5220systems to encode a text in some region or string. If you don't want
5221a user interaction, use one of these functions instead of
5222select-safe-coding-system.
5223
5224*** The explicit encoding and decoding functions, such as
5225decode-coding-region and encode-coding-string, now set
5226last-coding-system-used to reflect the actual way encoding or decoding
5227was done.
5228
5229*** The new function detect-coding-with-language-environment can be
5230used to detect a coding system of text according to priorities of
5231coding systems used by some specific language environment.
5232
5233*** The functions detect-coding-region and detect-coding-string always
5234return a list if the arg HIGHEST is nil. Thus, if only ASCII
5235characters are found, they now return a list of single element
5236`undecided' or its subsidiaries.
5237
5238*** The new functions coding-system-change-eol-conversion and
5239coding-system-change-text-conversion can be used to get a different
5240coding system than what specified only in how end-of-line or text is
5241converted.
5242
5243*** The new function set-selection-coding-system can be used to set a
5244coding system for communicating with other X clients.
5245
5246*** The function `map-char-table' now passes as argument only valid
5247character codes, plus generic characters that stand for entire
5248character sets or entire subrows of a character set. In other words,
5249each time `map-char-table' calls its FUNCTION argument, the key value
5250either will be a valid individual character code, or will stand for a
5251range of characters.
5252
5253*** The new function `char-valid-p' can be used for checking whether a
5254Lisp object is a valid character code or not.
5255
5256*** The new function `charset-after' returns a charset of a character
5257in the current buffer at position POS.
5258
5259*** Input methods are now implemented using the variable
5260input-method-function. If this is non-nil, its value should be a
5261function; then, whenever Emacs reads an input event that is a printing
5262character with no modifier bits, it calls that function, passing the
5263event as an argument. Often this function will read more input, first
5264binding input-method-function to nil.
5265
5266The return value should be a list of the events resulting from input
5267method processing. These events will be processed sequentially as
5268input, before resorting to unread-command-events. Events returned by
5269the input method function are not passed to the input method function,
5270not even if they are printing characters with no modifier bits.
5271
5272The input method function is not called when reading the second and
5273subsequent events of a key sequence.
5274
5275*** You can customize any language environment by using
5276set-language-environment-hook and exit-language-environment-hook.
5277
5278The hook `exit-language-environment-hook' should be used to undo
5279customizations that you made with set-language-environment-hook. For
5280instance, if you set up a special key binding for a specific language
5281environment by set-language-environment-hook, you should set up
5282exit-language-environment-hook to restore the normal key binding.
5283\f
5284* Changes in Emacs 20.1
5285
5286** Emacs has a new facility for customization of its many user
5287options. It is called M-x customize. With this facility you can look
5288at the many user options in an organized way; they are grouped into a
5289tree structure.
5290
5291M-x customize also knows what sorts of values are legitimate for each
5292user option and ensures that you don't use invalid values.
5293
5294With M-x customize, you can set options either for the present Emacs
5295session or permanently. (Permanent settings are stored automatically
5296in your .emacs file.)
5297
5298** Scroll bars are now on the left side of the window.
5299You can change this with M-x customize-option scroll-bar-mode.
5300
5301** The mode line no longer includes the string `Emacs'.
5302This makes more space in the mode line for other information.
5303
5304** When you select a region with the mouse, it is highlighted
5305immediately afterward. At that time, if you type the DELETE key, it
5306kills the region.
5307
5308The BACKSPACE key, and the ASCII character DEL, do not do this; they
5309delete the character before point, as usual.
5310
5311** In an incremental search the whole current match is highlighted
5312on terminals which support this. (You can disable this feature
5313by setting search-highlight to nil.)
5314
5315** In the minibuffer, in some cases, you can now use M-n to
5316insert the default value into the minibuffer as text. In effect,
5317the default value (if the minibuffer routines know it) is tacked
5318onto the history "in the future". (The more normal use of the
5319history list is to use M-p to insert minibuffer input used in the
5320past.)
5321
5322** In Text mode, now only blank lines separate paragraphs.
5323This makes it possible to get the full benefit of Adaptive Fill mode
5324in Text mode, and other modes derived from it (such as Mail mode).
5325TAB in Text mode now runs the command indent-relative; this
5326makes a practical difference only when you use indented paragraphs.
5327
5328As a result, the old Indented Text mode is now identical to Text mode,
5329and is an alias for it.
5330
5331If you want spaces at the beginning of a line to start a paragraph,
5332use the new mode, Paragraph Indent Text mode.
5333
5334** Scrolling changes
5335
5336*** Scroll commands to scroll a whole screen now preserve the screen
5337position of the cursor, if scroll-preserve-screen-position is non-nil.
5338
5339In this mode, if you scroll several screens back and forth, finishing
5340on the same screen where you started, the cursor goes back to the line
5341where it started.
5342
5343*** If you set scroll-conservatively to a small number, then when you
5344move point a short distance off the screen, Emacs will scroll the
5345screen just far enough to bring point back on screen, provided that
5346does not exceed `scroll-conservatively' lines.
5347
5348*** The new variable scroll-margin says how close point can come to the
5349top or bottom of a window. It is a number of screen lines; if point
5350comes within that many lines of the top or bottom of the window, Emacs
5351recenters the window.
5352
5353** International character set support (MULE)
5354
5355Emacs now supports a wide variety of international character sets,
5356including European variants of the Latin alphabet, as well as Chinese,
5357Devanagari (Hindi and Marathi), Ethiopian, Greek, IPA, Japanese,
5358Korean, Lao, Russian, Thai, Tibetan, and Vietnamese scripts. These
5359features have been merged from the modified version of Emacs known as
5360MULE (for "MULti-lingual Enhancement to GNU Emacs")
5361
5362Users of these scripts have established many more-or-less standard
5363coding systems for storing files. Emacs uses a single multibyte
5364character encoding within Emacs buffers; it can translate from a wide
5365variety of coding systems when reading a file and can translate back
5366into any of these coding systems when saving a file.
5367
5368Keyboards, even in the countries where these character sets are used,
5369generally don't have keys for all the characters in them. So Emacs
5370supports various "input methods", typically one for each script or
5371language, to make it possible to type them.
5372
5373The Emacs internal multibyte encoding represents a non-ASCII
5374character as a sequence of bytes in the range 0200 through 0377.
5375
5376The new prefix key C-x RET is used for commands that pertain
5377to multibyte characters, coding systems, and input methods.
5378
5379You can disable multibyte character support as follows:
5380
5381 (setq-default enable-multibyte-characters nil)
5382
5383Calling the function standard-display-european turns off multibyte
5384characters, unless you specify a non-nil value for the second
5385argument, AUTO. This provides compatibility for people who are
5386already using standard-display-european to continue using unibyte
5387characters for their work until they want to change.
5388
5389*** Input methods
5390
5391An input method is a kind of character conversion which is designed
5392specifically for interactive input. In Emacs, typically each language
5393has its own input method (though sometimes several languages which use
5394the same characters can share one input method). Some languages
5395support several input methods.
5396
5397The simplest kind of input method works by mapping ASCII letters into
5398another alphabet. This is how the Greek and Russian input methods
5399work.
5400
5401A more powerful technique is composition: converting sequences of
5402characters into one letter. Many European input methods use
5403composition to produce a single non-ASCII letter from a sequence which
5404consists of a letter followed by diacritics. For example, a' is one
5405sequence of two characters that might be converted into a single
5406letter.
5407
5408The input methods for syllabic scripts typically use mapping followed
5409by conversion. The input methods for Thai and Korean work this way.
5410First, letters are mapped into symbols for particular sounds or tone
5411marks; then, sequences of these which make up a whole syllable are
5412mapped into one syllable sign--most often a "composite character".
5413
5414None of these methods works very well for Chinese and Japanese, so
5415they are handled specially. First you input a whole word using
5416phonetic spelling; then, after the word is in the buffer, Emacs
5417converts it into one or more characters using a large dictionary.
5418
5419Since there is more than one way to represent a phonetically spelled
5420word using Chinese characters, Emacs can only guess which one to use;
5421typically these input methods give you a way to say "guess again" if
5422the first guess is wrong.
5423
5424*** The command C-x RET m (toggle-enable-multibyte-characters)
5425turns multibyte character support on or off for the current buffer.
5426
5427If multibyte character support is turned off in a buffer, then each
5428byte is a single character, even codes 0200 through 0377--exactly as
5429they did in Emacs 19.34. This includes the features for support for
5430the European characters, ISO Latin-1 and ISO Latin-2.
5431
5432However, there is no need to turn off multibyte character support to
5433use ISO Latin-1 or ISO Latin-2; the Emacs multibyte character set
5434includes all the characters in these character sets, and Emacs can
5435translate automatically to and from either one.
5436
5437*** Visiting a file in unibyte mode.
5438
5439Turning off multibyte character support in the buffer after visiting a
5440file with multibyte code conversion will display the multibyte
5441sequences already in the buffer, byte by byte. This is probably not
5442what you want.
5443
5444If you want to edit a file of unibyte characters (Latin-1, for
5445example), you can do it by specifying `no-conversion' as the coding
5446system when reading the file. This coding system also turns off
5447multibyte characters in that buffer.
5448
5449If you turn off multibyte character support entirely, this turns off
5450character conversion as well.
5451
5452*** Displaying international characters on X Windows.
5453
5454A font for X typically displays just one alphabet or script.
5455Therefore, displaying the entire range of characters Emacs supports
5456requires using many fonts.
5457
5458Therefore, Emacs now supports "fontsets". Each fontset is a
5459collection of fonts, each assigned to a range of character codes.
5460
5461A fontset has a name, like a font. Individual fonts are defined by
5462the X server; fontsets are defined within Emacs itself. But once you
5463have defined a fontset, you can use it in a face or a frame just as
5464you would use a font.
5465
5466If a fontset specifies no font for a certain character, or if it
5467specifies a font that does not exist on your system, then it cannot
5468display that character. It will display an empty box instead.
5469
5470The fontset height and width are determined by the ASCII characters
5471(that is, by the font in the fontset which is used for ASCII
5472characters). If another font in the fontset has a different height,
5473or the wrong width, then characters assigned to that font are clipped,
5474and displayed within a box if highlight-wrong-size-font is non-nil.
5475
5476*** Defining fontsets.
5477
5478Emacs does not use any fontset by default. Its default font is still
5479chosen as in previous versions. You can tell Emacs to use a fontset
5480with the `-fn' option or the `Font' X resource.
5481
5482Emacs creates a standard fontset automatically according to the value
5483of standard-fontset-spec. This fontset's short name is
5484`fontset-standard'. Bold, italic, and bold-italic variants of the
5485standard fontset are created automatically.
5486
5487If you specify a default ASCII font with the `Font' resource or `-fn'
5488argument, a fontset is generated from it. This works by replacing the
5489FOUNDARY, FAMILY, ADD_STYLE, and AVERAGE_WIDTH fields of the font name
5490with `*' then using this to specify a fontset. This fontset's short
5491name is `fontset-startup'.
5492
5493Emacs checks resources of the form Fontset-N where N is 0, 1, 2...
5494The resource value should have this form:
5495 FONTSET-NAME, [CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME]...
5496FONTSET-NAME should have the form of a standard X font name, except:
5497 * most fields should be just the wild card "*".
5498 * the CHARSET_REGISTRY field should be "fontset"
5499 * the CHARSET_ENCODING field can be any nickname of the fontset.
5500The construct CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME can be repeated any number
5501of times; each time specifies the font for one character set.
5502CHARSET-NAME should be the name name of a character set, and
5503FONT-NAME should specify an actual font to use for that character set.
5504
5505Each of these fontsets has an alias which is made from the
5506last two font name fields, CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING.
5507You can refer to the fontset by that alias or by its full name.
5508
5509For any character sets that you don't mention, Emacs tries to choose a
5510font by substituting into FONTSET-NAME. For instance, with the
5511following resource,
5512 Emacs*Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24
5513the font for ASCII is generated as below:
5514 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1
5515Here is the substitution rule:
5516 Change CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING to that of the charset
5517 defined in the variable x-charset-registries. For instance, ASCII has
5518 the entry (ascii . "ISO8859-1") in this variable. Then, reduce
5519 sequences of wild cards -*-...-*- with a single wildcard -*-.
5520 (This is to prevent use of auto-scaled fonts.)
5521
5522The function which processes the fontset resource value to create the
5523fontset is called create-fontset-from-fontset-spec. You can also call
5524that function explicitly to create a fontset.
5525
5526With the X resource Emacs.Font, you can specify a fontset name just
5527like an actual font name. But be careful not to specify a fontset
5528name in a wildcard resource like Emacs*Font--that tries to specify the
5529fontset for other purposes including menus, and they cannot handle
5530fontsets.
5531
5532*** The command M-x set-language-environment sets certain global Emacs
5533defaults for a particular choice of language.
5534
5535Selecting a language environment typically specifies a default input
5536method and which coding systems to recognize automatically when
5537visiting files. However, it does not try to reread files you have
5538already visited; the text in those buffers is not affected. The
5539language environment may also specify a default choice of coding
5540system for new files that you create.
5541
5542It makes no difference which buffer is current when you use
5543set-language-environment, because these defaults apply globally to the
5544whole Emacs session.
5545
5546For example, M-x set-language-environment RET Latin-1 RET
5547chooses the Latin-1 character set. In the .emacs file, you can do this
5548with (set-language-environment "Latin-1").
5549
5550*** The command C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system)
5551specifies the file coding system for the current buffer. This
5552specifies what sort of character code translation to do when saving
5553the file. As an argument, you must specify the name of one of the
5554coding systems that Emacs supports.
5555
5556*** The command C-x RET c (universal-coding-system-argument)
5557lets you specify a coding system when you read or write a file.
5558This command uses the minibuffer to read a coding system name.
5559After you exit the minibuffer, the specified coding system
5560is used for *the immediately following command*.
5561
5562So if the immediately following command is a command to read or
5563write a file, it uses the specified coding system for that file.
5564
5565If the immediately following command does not use the coding system,
5566then C-x RET c ultimately has no effect.
5567
5568For example, C-x RET c iso-8859-1 RET C-x C-f temp RET
5569visits the file `temp' treating it as ISO Latin-1.
5570
5571*** You can specify the coding system for a file using the -*-
5572construct. Include `coding: CODINGSYSTEM;' inside the -*-...-*-
5573to specify use of coding system CODINGSYSTEM. You can also
5574specify the coding system in a local variable list at the end
5575of the file.
5576
5577*** The command C-x RET t (set-terminal-coding-system) specifies
5578the coding system for terminal output. If you specify a character
5579code for terminal output, all characters output to the terminal are
5580translated into that character code.
5581
5582This feature is useful for certain character-only terminals built in
5583various countries to support the languages of those countries.
5584
5585By default, output to the terminal is not translated at all.
5586
5587*** The command C-x RET k (set-keyboard-coding-system) specifies
5588the coding system for keyboard input.
5589
5590Character code translation of keyboard input is useful for terminals
5591with keys that send non-ASCII graphic characters--for example,
5592some terminals designed for ISO Latin-1 or subsets of it.
5593
5594By default, keyboard input is not translated at all.
5595
5596Character code translation of keyboard input is similar to using an
5597input method, in that both define sequences of keyboard input that
5598translate into single characters. However, input methods are designed
5599to be convenient for interactive use, while the code translations are
5600designed to work with terminals.
5601
5602*** The command C-x RET p (set-buffer-process-coding-system)
5603specifies the coding system for input and output to a subprocess.
5604This command applies to the current buffer; normally, each subprocess
5605has its own buffer, and thus you can use this command to specify
5606translation to and from a particular subprocess by giving the command
5607in the corresponding buffer.
5608
5609By default, process input and output are not translated at all.
5610
5611*** The variable file-name-coding-system specifies the coding system
5612to use for encoding file names before operating on them.
5613It is also used for decoding file names obtained from the system.
5614
5615*** The command C-\ (toggle-input-method) activates or deactivates
5616an input method. If no input method has been selected before, the
5617command prompts for you to specify the language and input method you
5618want to use.
5619
5620C-u C-\ (select-input-method) lets you switch to a different input
5621method. C-h C-\ (or C-h I) describes the current input method.
5622
5623*** Some input methods remap the keyboard to emulate various keyboard
5624layouts commonly used for particular scripts. How to do this
5625remapping properly depends on your actual keyboard layout. To specify
5626which layout your keyboard has, use M-x quail-set-keyboard-layout.
5627
5628*** The command C-h C (describe-coding-system) displays
5629the coding systems currently selected for various purposes, plus
5630related information.
5631
5632*** The command C-h h (view-hello-file) displays a file called
5633HELLO, which has examples of text in many languages, using various
5634scripts.
5635
5636*** The command C-h L (describe-language-support) displays
5637information about the support for a particular language.
5638You specify the language as an argument.
5639
5640*** The mode line now contains a letter or character that identifies
5641the coding system used in the visited file. It normally follows the
5642first dash.
5643
5644A dash indicates the default state of affairs: no code conversion
5645(except CRLF => newline if appropriate). `=' means no conversion
5646whatsoever. The ISO 8859 coding systems are represented by digits
56471 through 9. Other coding systems are represented by letters:
5648
5649 A alternativnyj (Russian)
5650 B big5 (Chinese)
5651 C cn-gb-2312 (Chinese)
5652 C iso-2022-cn (Chinese)
5653 D in-is13194-devanagari (Indian languages)
5654 E euc-japan (Japanese)
5655 I iso-2022-cjk or iso-2022-ss2 (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
5656 J junet (iso-2022-7) or old-jis (iso-2022-jp-1978-irv) (Japanese)
5657 K euc-korea (Korean)
5658 R koi8 (Russian)
5659 Q tibetan
5660 S shift_jis (Japanese)
5661 T lao
5662 T tis620 (Thai)
5663 V viscii or vscii (Vietnamese)
5664 i iso-2022-lock (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
5665 k iso-2022-kr (Korean)
5666 v viqr (Vietnamese)
5667 z hz (Chinese)
5668
5669When you are using a character-only terminal (not a window system),
5670two additional characters appear in between the dash and the file
5671coding system. These two characters describe the coding system for
5672keyboard input, and the coding system for terminal output.
5673
5674*** The new variable rmail-file-coding-system specifies the code
5675conversion to use for RMAIL files. The default value is nil.
5676
5677When you read mail with Rmail, each message is decoded automatically
5678into Emacs' internal format. This has nothing to do with
5679rmail-file-coding-system. That variable controls reading and writing
5680Rmail files themselves.
5681
5682*** The new variable sendmail-coding-system specifies the code
5683conversion for outgoing mail. The default value is nil.
5684
5685Actually, there are three different ways of specifying the coding system
5686for sending mail:
5687
5688- If you use C-x RET f in the mail buffer, that takes priority.
5689- Otherwise, if you set sendmail-coding-system non-nil, that specifies it.
5690- Otherwise, the default coding system for new files is used,
5691 if that is non-nil. That comes from your language environment.
5692- Otherwise, Latin-1 is used.
5693
5694*** The command C-h t (help-with-tutorial) accepts a prefix argument
5695to specify the language for the tutorial file. Currently, English,
5696Japanese, Korean and Thai are supported. We welcome additional
5697translations.
5698
5699** An easy new way to visit a file with no code or format conversion
5700of any kind: Use M-x find-file-literally. There is also a command
5701insert-file-literally which inserts a file into the current buffer
5702without any conversion.
5703
5704** C-q's handling of octal character codes is changed.
5705You can now specify any number of octal digits.
5706RET terminates the digits and is discarded;
5707any other non-digit terminates the digits and is then used as input.
5708
5709** There are new commands for looking up Info documentation for
5710functions, variables and file names used in your programs.
5711
5712Type M-x info-lookup-symbol to look up a symbol in the buffer at point.
5713Type M-x info-lookup-file to look up a file in the buffer at point.
5714
5715Precisely which Info files are used to look it up depends on the major
5716mode. For example, in C mode, the GNU libc manual is used.
5717
5718** M-TAB in most programming language modes now runs the command
5719complete-symbol. This command performs completion on the symbol name
5720in the buffer before point.
5721
5722With a numeric argument, it performs completion based on the set of
5723symbols documented in the Info files for the programming language that
5724you are using.
5725
5726With no argument, it does completion based on the current tags tables,
5727just like the old binding of M-TAB (complete-tag).
5728
5729** File locking works with NFS now.
5730
5731The lock file for FILENAME is now a symbolic link named .#FILENAME,
5732in the same directory as FILENAME.
5733
5734This means that collision detection between two different machines now
5735works reasonably well; it also means that no file server or directory
5736can become a bottleneck.
5737
5738The new method does have drawbacks. It means that collision detection
5739does not operate when you edit a file in a directory where you cannot
5740create new files. Collision detection also doesn't operate when the
5741file server does not support symbolic links. But these conditions are
5742rare, and the ability to have collision detection while using NFS is
5743so useful that the change is worth while.
5744
5745When Emacs or a system crashes, this may leave behind lock files which
5746are stale. So you may occasionally get warnings about spurious
5747collisions. When you determine that the collision is spurious, just
5748tell Emacs to go ahead anyway.
5749
5750** If you wish to use Show Paren mode to display matching parentheses,
5751it is no longer sufficient to load paren.el. Instead you must call
5752show-paren-mode.
5753
5754** If you wish to use Delete Selection mode to replace a highlighted
5755selection when you insert new text, it is no longer sufficient to load
5756delsel.el. Instead you must call the function delete-selection-mode.
5757
5758** If you wish to use Partial Completion mode to complete partial words
5759within symbols or filenames, it is no longer sufficient to load
5760complete.el. Instead you must call the function partial-completion-mode.
5761
5762** If you wish to use uniquify to rename buffers for you,
5763it is no longer sufficient to load uniquify.el. You must also
5764set uniquify-buffer-name-style to one of the non-nil legitimate values.
5765
5766** Changes in View mode.
5767
5768*** Several new commands are available in View mode.
5769Do H in view mode for a list of commands.
5770
5771*** There are two new commands for entering View mode:
5772view-file-other-frame and view-buffer-other-frame.
5773
5774*** Exiting View mode does a better job of restoring windows to their
5775previous state.
5776
5777*** New customization variable view-scroll-auto-exit. If non-nil,
5778scrolling past end of buffer makes view mode exit.
5779
5780*** New customization variable view-exits-all-viewing-windows. If
5781non-nil, view-mode will at exit restore all windows viewing buffer,
5782not just the selected window.
5783
5784*** New customization variable view-read-only. If non-nil, visiting a
5785read-only file automatically enters View mode, and toggle-read-only
5786turns View mode on or off.
5787
5788*** New customization variable view-remove-frame-by-deleting controls
5789how to remove a not needed frame at view mode exit. If non-nil,
5790delete the frame, if nil make an icon of it.
5791
5792** C-x v l, the command to print a file's version control log,
5793now positions point at the entry for the file's current branch version.
5794
5795** C-x v =, the command to compare a file with the last checked-in version,
5796has a new feature. If the file is currently not locked, so that it is
5797presumably identical to the last checked-in version, the command now asks
5798which version to compare with.
5799
5800** When using hideshow.el, incremental search can temporarily show hidden
5801blocks if a match is inside the block.
5802
5803The block is hidden again if the search is continued and the next match
5804is outside the block. By customizing the variable
5805isearch-hide-immediately you can choose to hide all the temporarily
5806shown blocks only when exiting from incremental search.
5807
5808By customizing the variable hs-isearch-open you can choose what kind
5809of blocks to temporarily show during isearch: comment blocks, code
5810blocks, all of them or none.
5811
5812** The new command C-x 4 0 (kill-buffer-and-window) kills the
5813current buffer and deletes the selected window. It asks for
5814confirmation first.
5815
5816** C-x C-w, which saves the buffer into a specified file name,
5817now changes the major mode according to that file name.
5818However, the mode will not be changed if
5819(1) a local variables list or the `-*-' line specifies a major mode, or
5820(2) the current major mode is a "special" mode,
5821 not suitable for ordinary files, or
5822(3) the new file name does not particularly specify any mode.
5823
5824This applies to M-x set-visited-file-name as well.
5825
5826However, if you set change-major-mode-with-file-name to nil, then
5827these commands do not change the major mode.
5828
5829** M-x occur changes.
5830
5831*** If the argument to M-x occur contains upper case letters,
5832it performs a case-sensitive search.
5833
5834*** In the *Occur* buffer made by M-x occur,
5835if you type g or M-x revert-buffer, this repeats the search
5836using the same regular expression and the same buffer as before.
5837
5838** In Transient Mark mode, the region in any one buffer is highlighted
5839in just one window at a time. At first, it is highlighted in the
5840window where you set the mark. The buffer's highlighting remains in
5841that window unless you select to another window which shows the same
5842buffer--then the highlighting moves to that window.
5843
5844** The feature to suggest key bindings when you use M-x now operates
5845after the command finishes. The message suggesting key bindings
5846appears temporarily in the echo area. The previous echo area contents
5847come back after a few seconds, in case they contain useful information.
5848
5849** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
5850selected buffers, so that the default for C-x b is now based on the
5851buffers recently selected in the selected frame.
5852
5853** Outline mode changes.
5854
5855*** Outline mode now uses overlays (this is the former noutline.el).
5856
5857*** Incremental searches skip over invisible text in Outline mode.
5858
5859** When a minibuffer window is active but not the selected window, if
5860you try to use the minibuffer, you used to get a nested minibuffer.
5861Now, this not only gives an error, it also cancels the minibuffer that
5862was already active.
5863
5864The motive for this change is so that beginning users do not
5865unknowingly move away from minibuffers, leaving them active, and then
5866get confused by it.
5867
5868If you want to be able to have recursive minibuffers, you must
5869set enable-recursive-minibuffers to non-nil.
5870
5871** Changes in dynamic abbrevs.
5872
5873*** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
5874conversion. If the expansion has mixed case not counting the first
5875character, and the abbreviation matches the beginning of the expansion
5876including case, then the expansion is copied verbatim.
5877
5878The expansion is also copied verbatim if the abbreviation itself has
5879mixed case. And using SPC M-/ to copy an additional word always
5880copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is all caps.
5881
5882*** The values of `dabbrev-case-replace' and `dabbrev-case-fold-search'
5883are no longer Lisp expressions. They have simply three possible
5884values.
5885
5886`dabbrev-case-replace' has these three values: nil (don't preserve
5887case), t (do), or `case-replace' (do like M-x query-replace).
5888`dabbrev-case-fold-search' has these three values: nil (don't ignore
5889case), t (do), or `case-fold-search' (do like search).
5890
5891** Minibuffer history lists are truncated automatically now to a
5892certain length. The variable history-length specifies how long they
5893can be. The default value is 30.
5894
5895** Changes in Mail mode.
5896
5897*** The key C-x m no longer runs the `mail' command directly.
5898Instead, it runs the command `compose-mail', which invokes the mail
5899composition mechanism you have selected with the variable
5900`mail-user-agent'. The default choice of user agent is
5901`sendmail-user-agent', which gives behavior compatible with the old
5902behavior.
5903
5904C-x 4 m now runs compose-mail-other-window, and C-x 5 m runs
5905compose-mail-other-frame.
5906
5907*** While composing a reply to a mail message, from Rmail, you can use
5908the command C-c C-r to cite just the region from the message you are
5909replying to. This copies the text which is the selected region in the
5910buffer that shows the original message.
5911
5912*** The command C-c C-i inserts a file at the end of the message,
5913with separator lines around the contents.
5914
5915*** The command M-x expand-mail-aliases expands all mail aliases
5916in suitable mail headers. Emacs automatically extracts mail alias
5917definitions from your mail alias file (e.g., ~/.mailrc). You do not
5918need to expand mail aliases yourself before sending mail.
5919
5920*** New features in the mail-complete command.
5921
5922**** The mail-complete command now inserts the user's full name,
5923for local users or if that is known. The variable mail-complete-style
5924controls the style to use, and whether to do this at all.
5925Its values are like those of mail-from-style.
5926
5927**** The variable mail-passwd-command lets you specify a shell command
5928to run to fetch a set of password-entries that add to the ones in
5929/etc/passwd.
5930
5931**** The variable mail-passwd-file now specifies a list of files to read
5932to get the list of user ids. By default, one file is used:
5933/etc/passwd.
5934
5935** You can "quote" a file name to inhibit special significance of
5936special syntax, by adding `/:' to the beginning. Thus, if you have a
5937directory named `/foo:', you can prevent it from being treated as a
5938reference to a remote host named `foo' by writing it as `/:/foo:'.
5939
5940Emacs uses this new construct automatically when necessary, such as
5941when you start it with a working directory whose name might otherwise
5942be taken to be magic.
5943
5944** There is a new command M-x grep-find which uses find to select
5945files to search through, and grep to scan them. The output is
5946available in a Compile mode buffer, as with M-x grep.
5947
5948M-x grep now uses the -e option if the grep program supports that.
5949(-e prevents problems if the search pattern starts with a dash.)
5950
5951** In Dired, the & command now flags for deletion the files whose names
5952suggest they are probably not needed in the long run.
5953
5954In Dired, * is now a prefix key for mark-related commands.
5955
5956new key dired.el binding old key
5957------- ---------------- -------
5958 * c dired-change-marks c
5959 * m dired-mark m
5960 * * dired-mark-executables * (binding deleted)
5961 * / dired-mark-directories / (binding deleted)
5962 * @ dired-mark-symlinks @ (binding deleted)
5963 * u dired-unmark u
5964 * DEL dired-unmark-backward DEL
5965 * ? dired-unmark-all-files M-C-?
5966 * ! dired-unmark-all-marks
5967 * % dired-mark-files-regexp % m
5968 * C-n dired-next-marked-file M-}
5969 * C-p dired-prev-marked-file M-{
5970
5971** Rmail changes.
5972
5973*** When Rmail cannot convert your incoming mail into Babyl format, it
5974saves the new mail in the file RMAILOSE.n, where n is an integer
5975chosen to make a unique name. This way, Rmail will not keep crashing
5976each time you run it.
5977
5978*** In Rmail, the variable rmail-summary-line-count-flag now controls
5979whether to include the line count in the summary. Non-nil means yes.
5980
5981*** In Rmail summary buffers, d and C-d (the commands to delete
5982messages) now take repeat counts as arguments. A negative argument
5983means to move in the opposite direction.
5984
5985*** In Rmail, the t command now takes an optional argument which lets
5986you specify whether to show the message headers in full or pruned.
5987
5988*** In Rmail, the new command w (rmail-output-body-to-file) writes
5989just the body of the current message into a file, without the headers.
5990It takes the file name from the message subject, by default, but you
5991can edit that file name in the minibuffer before it is actually used
5992for output.
5993
5994** Gnus changes.
5995
5996*** nntp.el has been totally rewritten in an asynchronous fashion.
5997
5998*** Article prefetching functionality has been moved up into
5999Gnus.
6000
6001*** Scoring can now be performed with logical operators like
6002`and', `or', `not', and parent redirection.
6003
6004*** Article washing status can be displayed in the
6005article mode line.
6006
6007*** gnus.el has been split into many smaller files.
6008
6009*** Suppression of duplicate articles based on Message-ID.
6010
6011(setq gnus-suppress-duplicates t)
6012
6013*** New variables for specifying what score and adapt files
6014are to be considered home score and adapt files. See
6015`gnus-home-score-file' and `gnus-home-adapt-files'.
6016
6017*** Groups can inherit group parameters from parent topics.
6018
6019*** Article editing has been revamped and is now usable.
6020
6021*** Signatures can be recognized in more intelligent fashions.
6022See `gnus-signature-separator' and `gnus-signature-limit'.
6023
6024*** Summary pick mode has been made to look more nn-like.
6025Line numbers are displayed and the `.' command can be
6026used to pick articles.
6027
6028*** Commands for moving the .newsrc.eld from one server to
6029another have been added.
6030
6031 `M-x gnus-change-server'
6032
6033*** A way to specify that "uninteresting" fields be suppressed when
6034generating lines in buffers.
6035
6036*** Several commands in the group buffer can be undone with
6037`M-C-_'.
6038
6039*** Scoring can be done on words using the new score type `w'.
6040
6041*** Adaptive scoring can be done on a Subject word-by-word basis:
6042
6043 (setq gnus-use-adaptive-scoring '(word))
6044
6045*** Scores can be decayed.
6046
6047 (setq gnus-decay-scores t)
6048
6049*** Scoring can be performed using a regexp on the Date header. The
6050Date is normalized to compact ISO 8601 format first.
6051
6052*** A new command has been added to remove all data on articles from
6053the native server.
6054
6055 `M-x gnus-group-clear-data-on-native-groups'
6056
6057*** A new command for reading collections of documents
6058(nndoc with nnvirtual on top) has been added -- `M-C-d'.
6059
6060*** Process mark sets can be pushed and popped.
6061
6062*** A new mail-to-news backend makes it possible to post
6063even when the NNTP server doesn't allow posting.
6064
6065*** A new backend for reading searches from Web search engines
6066(DejaNews, Alta Vista, InReference) has been added.
6067
6068 Use the `G w' command in the group buffer to create such
6069 a group.
6070
6071*** Groups inside topics can now be sorted using the standard
6072sorting functions, and each topic can be sorted independently.
6073
6074 See the commands under the `T S' submap.
6075
6076*** Subsets of the groups can be sorted independently.
6077
6078 See the commands under the `G P' submap.
6079
6080*** Cached articles can be pulled into the groups.
6081
6082 Use the `Y c' command.
6083
6084*** Score files are now applied in a more reliable order.
6085
6086*** Reports on where mail messages end up can be generated.
6087
6088 `M-x nnmail-split-history'
6089
6090*** More hooks and functions have been added to remove junk
6091from incoming mail before saving the mail.
6092
6093 See `nnmail-prepare-incoming-header-hook'.
6094
6095*** The nnml mail backend now understands compressed article files.
6096
6097*** To enable Gnus to read/post multi-lingual articles, you must execute
6098the following code, for instance, in your .emacs.
6099
6100 (add-hook 'gnus-startup-hook 'gnus-mule-initialize)
6101
6102Then, when you start Gnus, it will decode non-ASCII text automatically
6103and show appropriate characters. (Note: if you are using gnus-mime
6104from the SEMI package, formerly known as TM, you should NOT add this
6105hook to gnus-startup-hook; gnus-mime has its own method of handling
6106this issue.)
6107
6108Since it is impossible to distinguish all coding systems
6109automatically, you may need to specify a choice of coding system for a
6110particular news group. This can be done by:
6111
6112 (gnus-mule-add-group NEWSGROUP 'CODING-SYSTEM)
6113
6114Here NEWSGROUP should be a string which names a newsgroup or a tree
6115of newsgroups. If NEWSGROUP is "XXX.YYY", all news groups under
6116"XXX.YYY" (including "XXX.YYY.ZZZ") will use the specified coding
6117system. CODING-SYSTEM specifies which coding system to use (for both
6118for reading and posting).
6119
6120CODING-SYSTEM can also be a cons cell of the form
6121 (READ-CODING-SYSTEM . POST-CODING-SYSTEM)
6122Then READ-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you read messages from the
6123newsgroups, while POST-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you post messages
6124there.
6125
6126Emacs knows the right coding systems for certain newsgroups by
6127default. Here are some of these default settings:
6128
6129 (gnus-mule-add-group "fj" 'iso-2022-7)
6130 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text" 'hz-gb-2312)
6131 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.hk" 'hz-gb-2312)
6132 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text.big5" 'cn-big5)
6133 (gnus-mule-add-group "soc.culture.vietnamese" '(nil . viqr))
6134
6135When you reply by mail to an article, these settings are ignored;
6136the mail is encoded according to sendmail-coding-system, as usual.
6137
6138** CC mode changes.
6139
6140*** If you edit primarily one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, Java)
6141code, you may want to make the CC Mode style variables have global
6142values so that you can set them directly in your .emacs file. To do
6143this, set c-style-variables-are-local-p to nil in your .emacs file.
6144Note that this only takes effect if you do it *before* cc-mode.el is
6145loaded.
6146
6147If you typically edit more than one style of C (or C++, Objective-C,
6148Java) code in a single Emacs session, you may want to make the CC Mode
6149style variables have buffer local values. By default, all buffers
6150share the same style variable settings; to make them buffer local, set
6151c-style-variables-are-local-p to t in your .emacs file. Note that you
6152must do this *before* CC Mode is loaded.
6153
6154*** The new variable c-indentation-style holds the C style name
6155of the current buffer.
6156
6157*** The variable c-block-comments-indent-p has been deleted, because
6158it is no longer necessary. C mode now handles all the supported styles
6159of block comments, with no need to say which one you will use.
6160
6161*** There is a new indentation style "python", which specifies the C
6162style that the Python developers like.
6163
6164*** There is a new c-cleanup-list option: brace-elseif-brace.
6165This says to put ...} else if (...) {... on one line,
6166just as brace-else-brace says to put ...} else {... on one line.
6167
6168** VC Changes [new]
6169
6170** In vc-retrieve-snapshot (C-x v r), if you don't specify a snapshot
6171name, it retrieves the *latest* versions of all files in the current
6172directory and its subdirectories (aside from files already locked).
6173
6174This feature is useful if your RCS directory is a link to a common
6175master directory, and you want to pick up changes made by other
6176developers.
6177
6178You can do the same thing for an individual file by typing C-u C-x C-q
6179RET in a buffer visiting that file.
6180
6181*** VC can now handle files under CVS that are being "watched" by
6182other developers. Such files are made read-only by CVS. To get a
6183writable copy, type C-x C-q in a buffer visiting such a file. VC then
6184calls "cvs edit", which notifies the other developers of it.
6185
6186*** vc-version-diff (C-u C-x v =) now suggests reasonable defaults for
6187version numbers, based on the current state of the file.
6188
6189** Calendar changes.
6190
6191A new function, list-holidays, allows you list holidays or subclasses
6192of holidays for ranges of years. Related menu items allow you do this
6193for the year of the selected date, or the following/previous years.
6194
6195** ps-print changes
6196
6197There are some new user variables for customizing the page layout.
6198
6199*** Paper size, paper orientation, columns
6200
6201The variable `ps-paper-type' determines the size of paper ps-print
6202formats for; it should contain one of the symbols:
6203`a4' `a3' `letter' `legal' `letter-small' `tabloid'
6204`ledger' `statement' `executive' `a4small' `b4' `b5'
6205It defaults to `letter'.
6206If you need other sizes, see the variable `ps-page-dimensions-database'.
6207
6208The variable `ps-landscape-mode' determines the orientation
6209of the printing on the page. nil, the default, means "portrait" mode,
6210non-nil means "landscape" mode.
6211
6212The variable `ps-number-of-columns' must be a positive integer.
6213It determines the number of columns both in landscape and portrait mode.
6214It defaults to 1.
6215
6216*** Horizontal layout
6217
6218The horizontal layout is determined by the variables
6219`ps-left-margin', `ps-inter-column', and `ps-right-margin'.
6220All are measured in points.
6221
6222*** Vertical layout
6223
6224The vertical layout is determined by the variables
6225`ps-bottom-margin', `ps-top-margin', and `ps-header-offset'.
6226All are measured in points.
6227
6228*** Headers
6229
6230If the variable `ps-print-header' is nil, no header is printed. Then
6231`ps-header-offset' is not relevant and `ps-top-margin' represents the
6232margin above the text.
6233
6234If the variable `ps-print-header-frame' is non-nil, a gaudy
6235framing box is printed around the header.
6236
6237The contents of the header are determined by `ps-header-lines',
6238`ps-show-n-of-n', `ps-left-header' and `ps-right-header'.
6239
6240The height of the header is determined by `ps-header-line-pad',
6241`ps-header-font-family', `ps-header-title-font-size' and
6242`ps-header-font-size'.
6243
6244*** Font managing
6245
6246The variable `ps-font-family' determines which font family is to be
6247used for ordinary text. Its value must be a key symbol in the alist
6248`ps-font-info-database'. You can add other font families by adding
6249elements to this alist.
6250
6251The variable `ps-font-size' determines the size of the font
6252for ordinary text. It defaults to 8.5 points.
6253
6254** hideshow changes.
6255
6256*** now supports hiding of blocks of single line comments (like // for
6257C++, ; for lisp).
6258
6259*** Support for java-mode added.
6260
6261*** When doing `hs-hide-all' it is now possible to also hide the comments
6262in the file if `hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is set.
6263
6264*** The new function `hs-hide-initial-comment' hides the the comments at
6265the beginning of the files. Finally those huge RCS logs don't stay in your
6266way! This is run by default when entering the `hs-minor-mode'.
6267
6268*** Now uses overlays instead of `selective-display', so is more
6269robust and a lot faster.
6270
6271*** A block beginning can span multiple lines.
6272
6273*** The new variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' if t, directs hideshow
6274to show only the beginning of a block when it is hidden. See the
6275documentation for more details.
6276
6277** Changes in Enriched mode.
6278
6279*** When you visit a file in enriched-mode, Emacs will make sure it is
6280filled to the current fill-column. This behavior is now independent
6281of the size of the window. When you save the file, the fill-column in
6282use is stored as well, so that the whole buffer need not be refilled
6283the next time unless the fill-column is different.
6284
6285*** use-hard-newlines is now a minor mode. When it is enabled, Emacs
6286distinguishes between hard and soft newlines, and treats hard newlines
6287as paragraph boundaries. Otherwise all newlines inserted are marked
6288as soft, and paragraph boundaries are determined solely from the text.
6289
6290** Font Lock mode
6291
6292*** Custom support
6293
6294The variables font-lock-face-attributes, font-lock-display-type and
6295font-lock-background-mode are now obsolete; the recommended way to specify the
6296faces to use for Font Lock mode is with M-x customize-group on the new custom
6297group font-lock-highlighting-faces. If you set font-lock-face-attributes in
6298your ~/.emacs file, Font Lock mode will respect its value. However, you should
6299consider converting from setting that variable to using M-x customize.
6300
6301You can still use X resources to specify Font Lock face appearances.
6302
6303*** Maximum decoration
6304
6305Fontification now uses the maximum level of decoration supported by
6306default. Previously, fontification used a mode-specific default level
6307of decoration, which is typically the minimum level of decoration
6308supported. You can set font-lock-maximum-decoration to nil
6309to get the old behavior.
6310
6311*** New support
6312
6313Support is now provided for Java, Objective-C, AWK and SIMULA modes.
6314
6315Note that Font Lock mode can be turned on without knowing exactly what modes
6316support Font Lock mode, via the command global-font-lock-mode.
6317
6318*** Configurable support
6319
6320Support for C, C++, Objective-C and Java can be more easily configured for
6321additional types and classes via the new variables c-font-lock-extra-types,
6322c++-font-lock-extra-types, objc-font-lock-extra-types and, you guessed it,
6323java-font-lock-extra-types. These value of each of these variables should be a
6324list of regexps matching the extra type names. For example, the default value
6325of c-font-lock-extra-types is ("\\sw+_t") which means fontification follows the
6326convention that C type names end in _t. This results in slower fontification.
6327
6328Of course, you can change the variables that specify fontification in whatever
6329way you wish, typically by adding regexps. However, these new variables make
6330it easier to make specific and common changes for the fontification of types.
6331
6332*** Adding highlighting patterns to existing support
6333
6334You can use the new function font-lock-add-keywords to add your own
6335highlighting patterns, such as for project-local or user-specific constructs,
6336for any mode.
6337
6338For example, to highlight `FIXME:' words in C comments, put:
6339
6340 (font-lock-add-keywords 'c-mode '(("\\<FIXME:" 0 font-lock-warning-face t)))
6341
6342in your ~/.emacs.
6343
6344*** New faces
6345
6346Font Lock now defines two new faces, font-lock-builtin-face and
6347font-lock-warning-face. These are intended to highlight builtin keywords,
6348distinct from a language's normal keywords, and objects that should be brought
6349to user attention, respectively. Various modes now use these new faces.
6350
6351*** Changes to fast-lock support mode
6352
6353The fast-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now process
6354cache files silently. You can use the new variable fast-lock-verbose, in the
6355same way as font-lock-verbose, to control this feature.
6356
6357*** Changes to lazy-lock support mode
6358
6359The lazy-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now fontify
6360according to the true syntactic context relative to other lines. You can use
6361the new variable lazy-lock-defer-contextually to control this feature. If
6362non-nil, changes to the buffer will cause subsequent lines in the buffer to be
6363refontified after lazy-lock-defer-time seconds of idle time. If nil, then only
6364the modified lines will be refontified; this is the same as the previous Lazy
6365Lock mode behaviour and the behaviour of Font Lock mode.
6366
6367This feature is useful in modes where strings or comments can span lines.
6368For example, if a string or comment terminating character is deleted, then if
6369this feature is enabled subsequent lines in the buffer will be correctly
6370refontified to reflect their new syntactic context. Previously, only the line
6371containing the deleted character would be refontified and you would have to use
6372the command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block) to refontify some lines.
6373
6374As a consequence of this new feature, two other variables have changed:
6375
6376Variable `lazy-lock-defer-driven' is renamed `lazy-lock-defer-on-scrolling'.
6377Variable `lazy-lock-defer-time' can now only be a time, i.e., a number.
6378Buffer modes for which on-the-fly deferral applies can be specified via the
6379new variable `lazy-lock-defer-on-the-fly'.
6380
6381If you set these variables in your ~/.emacs, then you may have to change those
6382settings.
6383
6384** Ada mode changes.
6385
6386*** There is now better support for using find-file.el with Ada mode.
6387If you switch between spec and body, the cursor stays in the same
6388procedure (modulo overloading). If a spec has no body file yet, but
6389you try to switch to its body file, Ada mode now generates procedure
6390stubs.
6391
6392*** There are two new commands:
6393 - `ada-make-local' : invokes gnatmake on the current buffer
6394 - `ada-check-syntax' : check syntax of current buffer.
6395
6396The user options `ada-compiler-make', `ada-make-options',
6397`ada-language-version', `ada-compiler-syntax-check', and
6398`ada-compile-options' are used within these commands.
6399
6400*** Ada mode can now work with Outline minor mode. The outline level
6401is calculated from the indenting, not from syntactic constructs.
6402Outlining does not work if your code is not correctly indented.
6403
6404*** The new function `ada-gnat-style' converts the buffer to the style of
6405formatting used in GNAT. It places two blanks after a comment start,
6406places one blank between a word end and an opening '(', and puts one
6407space between a comma and the beginning of a word.
6408
6409** Scheme mode changes.
6410
6411*** Scheme mode indentation now uses many of the facilities of Lisp
6412mode; therefore, the variables to customize it are the variables used
6413for Lisp mode which have names starting with `lisp-'. The variables
6414with names starting with `scheme-' which used to do this no longer
6415have any effect.
6416
6417If you want to use different indentation for Scheme and Lisp, this is
6418still possible, but now you must do it by adding a hook to
6419scheme-mode-hook, which could work by setting the `lisp-' indentation
6420variables as buffer-local variables.
6421
6422*** DSSSL mode is a variant of Scheme mode, for editing DSSSL scripts.
6423Use M-x dsssl-mode.
6424
6425** Changes to the emacsclient program
6426
6427*** If a socket can't be found, and environment variables LOGNAME or
6428USER are set, emacsclient now looks for a socket based on the UID
6429associated with the name. That is an emacsclient running as root
6430can connect to an Emacs server started by a non-root user.
6431
6432*** The emacsclient program now accepts an option --no-wait which tells
6433it to return immediately without waiting for you to "finish" the
6434buffer in Emacs.
6435
6436*** The new option --alternate-editor allows to specify an editor to
6437use if Emacs is not running. The environment variable
6438ALTERNATE_EDITOR can be used for the same effect; the command line
6439option takes precedence.
6440
6441** M-x eldoc-mode enables a minor mode in which the echo area
6442constantly shows the parameter list for function being called at point
6443(in Emacs Lisp and Lisp Interaction modes only).
6444
6445** C-x n d now runs the new command narrow-to-defun,
6446which narrows the accessible parts of the buffer to just
6447the current defun.
6448
6449** Emacs now handles the `--' argument in the standard way; all
6450following arguments are treated as ordinary file names.
6451
6452** On MSDOS and Windows, the bookmark file is now called _emacs.bmk,
6453and the saved desktop file is now called _emacs.desktop (truncated if
6454necessary).
6455
6456** When you kill a buffer that visits a file,
6457if there are any registers that save positions in the file,
6458these register values no longer become completely useless.
6459If you try to go to such a register with C-x j, then you are
6460asked whether to visit the file again. If you say yes,
6461it visits the file and then goes to the same position.
6462
6463** When you visit a file that changes frequently outside Emacs--for
6464example, a log of output from a process that continues to run--it may
6465be useful for Emacs to revert the file without querying you whenever
6466you visit the file afresh with C-x C-f.
6467
6468You can request this behavior for certain files by setting the
6469variable revert-without-query to a list of regular expressions. If a
6470file's name matches any of these regular expressions, find-file and
6471revert-buffer revert the buffer without asking for permission--but
6472only if you have not edited the buffer text yourself.
6473
6474** set-default-font has been renamed to set-frame-font
6475since it applies only to the current frame.
6476
6477** In TeX mode, you can use the variable tex-main-file to specify the
6478file for tex-file to run TeX on. (By default, tex-main-file is nil,
6479and tex-file runs TeX on the current visited file.)
6480
6481This is useful when you are editing a document that consists of
6482multiple files. In each of the included files, you can set up a local
6483variable list which specifies the top-level file of your document for
6484tex-main-file. Then tex-file will run TeX on the whole document
6485instead of just the file you are editing.
6486
6487** RefTeX mode
6488
6489RefTeX mode is a new minor mode with special support for \label, \ref
6490and \cite macros in LaTeX documents. RefTeX distinguishes labels of
6491different environments (equation, figure, ...) and has full support for
6492multifile documents. To use it, select a buffer with a LaTeX document and
6493turn the mode on with M-x reftex-mode. Here are the main user commands:
6494
6495C-c ( reftex-label
6496 Creates a label semi-automatically. RefTeX is context sensitive and
6497 knows which kind of label is needed.
6498
6499C-c ) reftex-reference
6500 Offers in a menu all labels in the document, along with context of the
6501 label definition. The selected label is referenced as \ref{LABEL}.
6502
6503C-c [ reftex-citation
6504 Prompts for a regular expression and displays a list of matching BibTeX
6505 database entries. The selected entry is cited with a \cite{KEY} macro.
6506
6507C-c & reftex-view-crossref
6508 Views the cross reference of a \ref or \cite command near point.
6509
6510C-c = reftex-toc
6511 Shows a table of contents of the (multifile) document. From there you
6512 can quickly jump to every section.
6513
6514Under X, RefTeX installs a "Ref" menu in the menu bar, with additional
6515commands. Press `?' to get help when a prompt mentions this feature.
6516Full documentation and customization examples are in the file
6517reftex.el. You can use the finder to view the file documentation:
6518C-h p --> tex --> reftex.el
6519
6520** Changes in BibTeX mode.
6521
6522*** Info documentation is now available.
6523
6524*** Don't allow parentheses in string constants anymore. This confused
6525both the BibTeX program and Emacs BibTeX mode.
6526
6527*** Renamed variable bibtex-mode-user-optional-fields to
6528bibtex-user-optional-fields.
6529
6530*** Removed variable bibtex-include-OPTannote
6531(use bibtex-user-optional-fields instead).
6532
6533*** New interactive functions to copy and kill fields and complete
6534entries to the BibTeX kill ring, from where they can be yanked back by
6535appropriate functions.
6536
6537*** New interactive functions for repositioning and marking of
6538entries. They are bound by default to M-C-l and M-C-h.
6539
6540*** New hook bibtex-clean-entry-hook. It is called after entry has
6541been cleaned.
6542
6543*** New variable bibtex-field-delimiters, which replaces variables
6544bibtex-field-{left|right}-delimiter.
6545
6546*** New variable bibtex-entry-delimiters to determine how entries
6547shall be delimited.
6548
6549*** Allow preinitialization of fields. See documentation of
6550bibtex-user-optional-fields, bibtex-entry-field-alist, and
6551bibtex-include-OPTkey for details.
6552
6553*** Book and InBook entries require either an author or an editor
6554field. This is now supported by bibtex.el. Alternative fields are
6555prefixed with `ALT'.
6556
6557*** New variable bibtex-entry-format, which replaces variable
6558bibtex-clean-entry-zap-empty-opts and allows specification of many
6559formatting options performed on cleaning an entry (see variable
6560documentation).
6561
6562*** Even more control on how automatic keys are generated. See
6563documentation of bibtex-generate-autokey for details. Transcriptions
6564for foreign languages other than German are now handled, too.
6565
6566*** New boolean user option bibtex-comma-after-last-field to decide if
6567comma should be inserted at end of last field.
6568
6569*** New boolean user option bibtex-align-at-equal-sign to determine if
6570alignment should be made at left side of field contents or at equal
6571signs. New user options to control entry layout (e.g. indentation).
6572
6573*** New function bibtex-fill-entry to realign entries.
6574
6575*** New function bibtex-reformat to reformat region or buffer.
6576
6577*** New function bibtex-convert-alien to convert a BibTeX database
6578from alien sources.
6579
6580*** New function bibtex-complete-key (similar to bibtex-complete-string)
6581to complete prefix to a key defined in buffer. Mainly useful in
6582crossref entries.
6583
6584*** New function bibtex-count-entries to count entries in buffer or
6585region.
6586
6587*** Added support for imenu.
6588
6589*** The function `bibtex-validate' now checks current region instead
6590of buffer if mark is active. Now it shows all errors of buffer in a
6591`compilation mode' buffer. You can use the normal commands (e.g.
6592`next-error') for compilation modes to jump to errors.
6593
6594*** New variable `bibtex-string-file-path' to determine where the files
6595from `bibtex-string-files' are searched.
6596
6597** Iso Accents mode now supports Latin-3 as an alternative.
6598
6599** The command next-error now opens blocks hidden by hideshow.
6600
6601** The function using-unix-filesystems has been replaced by the
6602functions add-untranslated-filesystem and remove-untranslated-filesystem.
6603Each of these functions takes the name of a drive letter or directory
6604as an argument.
6605
6606When a filesystem is added as untranslated, all files on it are read
6607and written in binary mode (no cr/lf translation is performed).
6608
6609** browse-url changes
6610
6611*** New methods for: Grail (browse-url-generic), MMM (browse-url-mmm),
6612Lynx in a separate xterm (browse-url-lynx-xterm) or in an Emacs window
6613(browse-url-lynx-emacs), remote W3 (browse-url-w3-gnudoit), generic
6614non-remote-controlled browsers (browse-url-generic) and associated
6615customization variables.
6616
6617*** New commands `browse-url-of-region' and `browse-url'.
6618
6619*** URLs marked up with <URL:...> (RFC1738) work if broken across
6620lines. Browsing methods can be associated with URL regexps
6621(e.g. mailto: URLs) via `browse-url-browser-function'.
6622
6623** Changes in Ediff
6624
6625*** Clicking Mouse-2 on a brief command description in Ediff control panel
6626pops up the Info file for this command.
6627
6628*** There is now a variable, ediff-autostore-merges, which controls whether
6629the result of a merge is saved in a file. By default, this is done only when
6630merge is done from a session group (eg, when merging files in two different
6631directories).
6632
6633*** Since Emacs 19.31 (this hasn't been announced before), Ediff can compare
6634and merge groups of files residing in different directories, or revisions of
6635files in the same directory.
6636
6637*** Since Emacs 19.31, Ediff can apply multi-file patches interactively.
6638The patches must be in the context format or GNU unified format. (The bug
6639related to the GNU format has now been fixed.)
6640
6641** Changes in Viper
6642
6643*** The startup file is now .viper instead of .vip
6644*** All variable/function names have been changed to start with viper-
6645 instead of vip-.
6646*** C-\ now simulates the meta-key in all Viper states.
6647*** C-z in Insert state now escapes to Vi for the duration of the next
6648Viper command. In Vi and Insert states, C-z behaves as before.
6649*** C-c \ escapes to Vi for one command if Viper is in Insert or Emacs states.
6650*** _ is no longer the meta-key in Vi state.
6651*** The variable viper-insert-state-cursor-color can be used to change cursor
6652color when Viper is in insert state.
6653*** If search lands the cursor near the top or the bottom of the window,
6654Viper pulls the window up or down to expose more context. The variable
6655viper-adjust-window-after-search controls this behavior.
6656
6657** Etags changes.
6658
6659*** In C, C++, Objective C and Java, Etags tags global variables by
6660default. The resulting tags files are inflated by 30% on average.
6661Use --no-globals to turn this feature off. Etags can also tag
6662variables which are members of structure-like constructs, but it does
6663not by default. Use --members to turn this feature on.
6664
6665*** C++ member functions are now recognized as tags.
6666
6667*** Java is tagged like C++. In addition, "extends" and "implements"
6668constructs are tagged. Files are recognised by the extension .java.
6669
6670*** Etags can now handle programs written in Postscript. Files are
6671recognised by the extensions .ps and .pdb (Postscript with C syntax).
6672In Postscript, tags are lines that start with a slash.
6673
6674*** Etags now handles Objective C and Objective C++ code. The usual C and
6675C++ tags are recognized in these languages; in addition, etags
6676recognizes special Objective C syntax for classes, class categories,
6677methods and protocols.
6678
6679*** Etags also handles Cobol. Files are recognised by the extension
6680.cobol. The tagged lines are those containing a word that begins in
6681column 8 and ends in a full stop, i.e. anything that could be a
6682paragraph name.
6683
6684*** Regexps in Etags now support intervals, as in ed or grep. The syntax of
6685an interval is \{M,N\}, and it means to match the preceding expression
6686at least M times and as many as N times.
6687
6688** The format for specifying a custom format for time-stamp to insert
6689in files has changed slightly.
6690
6691With the new enhancements to the functionality of format-time-string,
6692time-stamp-format will change to be eventually compatible with it.
6693This conversion is being done in two steps to maintain compatibility
6694with old time-stamp-format values.
6695
6696In the new scheme, alternate case is signified by the number-sign
6697(`#') modifier, rather than changing the case of the format character.
6698This feature is as yet incompletely implemented for compatibility
6699reasons.
6700
6701In the old time-stamp-format, all numeric fields defaulted to their
6702natural width. (With format-time-string, each format has a
6703fixed-width default.) In this version, you can specify the colon
6704(`:') modifier to a numeric conversion to mean "give me the historical
6705time-stamp-format width default." Do not use colon if you are
6706specifying an explicit width, as in "%02d".
6707
6708Numbers are no longer truncated to the requested width, except in the
6709case of "%02y", which continues to give a two-digit year. Digit
6710truncation probably wasn't being used for anything else anyway.
6711
6712The new formats will work with old versions of Emacs. New formats are
6713being recommended now to allow time-stamp-format to change in the
6714future to be compatible with format-time-string. The new forms being
6715recommended now will continue to work then.
6716
6717See the documentation string for the variable time-stamp-format for
6718details.
6719
6720** There are some additional major modes:
6721
6722dcl-mode, for editing VMS DCL files.
6723m4-mode, for editing files of m4 input.
6724meta-mode, for editing MetaFont and MetaPost source files.
6725
6726** In Shell mode, the command shell-copy-environment-variable lets you
6727copy the value of a specified environment variable from the subshell
6728into Emacs.
6729
6730** New Lisp packages include:
6731
6732*** battery.el displays battery status for laptops.
6733
6734*** M-x bruce (named after Lenny Bruce) is a program that might
6735be used for adding some indecent words to your email.
6736
6737*** M-x crisp-mode enables an emulation for the CRiSP editor.
6738
6739*** M-x dirtrack arranges for better tracking of directory changes
6740in shell buffers.
6741
6742*** The new library elint.el provides for linting of Emacs Lisp code.
6743See the documentation for `elint-initialize', `elint-current-buffer'
6744and `elint-defun'.
6745
6746*** M-x expand-add-abbrevs defines a special kind of abbrev which is
6747meant for programming constructs. These abbrevs expand like ordinary
6748ones, when you type SPC, but only at the end of a line and not within
6749strings or comments.
6750
6751These abbrevs can act as templates: you can define places within an
6752abbrev for insertion of additional text. Once you expand the abbrev,
6753you can then use C-x a p and C-x a n to move back and forth to these
6754insertion points. Thus you can conveniently insert additional text
6755at these points.
6756
6757*** filecache.el remembers the location of files so that you
6758can visit them by short forms of their names.
6759
6760*** find-func.el lets you find the definition of the user-loaded
6761Emacs Lisp function at point.
6762
6763*** M-x handwrite converts text to a "handwritten" picture.
6764
6765*** M-x iswitchb-buffer is a command for switching to a buffer, much like
6766switch-buffer, but it reads the argument in a more helpful way.
6767
6768*** M-x landmark implements a neural network for landmark learning.
6769
6770*** M-x locate provides a convenient interface to the `locate' program.
6771
6772*** M4 mode is a new mode for editing files of m4 input.
6773
6774*** mantemp.el creates C++ manual template instantiations
6775from the GCC error messages which indicate which instantiations are needed.
6776
6777*** mouse-copy.el provides a one-click copy and move feature.
6778You can drag a region with M-mouse-1, and it is automatically
6779inserted at point. M-Shift-mouse-1 deletes the text from its
6780original place after inserting the copy.
6781
6782*** mouse-drag.el lets you do scrolling by dragging Mouse-2
6783on the buffer.
6784
6785You click the mouse and move; that distance either translates into the
6786velocity to scroll (with mouse-drag-throw) or the distance to scroll
6787(with mouse-drag-drag). Horizontal scrolling is enabled when needed.
6788
6789Enable mouse-drag with:
6790 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-throw)
6791-or-
6792 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-drag)
6793
6794*** mspools.el is useful for determining which mail folders have
6795mail waiting to be read in them. It works with procmail.
6796
6797*** Octave mode is a major mode for editing files of input for Octave.
6798It comes with a facility for communicating with an Octave subprocess.
6799
6800*** ogonek
6801
6802The ogonek package provides functions for changing the coding of
6803Polish diacritic characters in buffers. Codings known from various
6804platforms are supported such as ISO8859-2, Mazovia, IBM Latin2, and
6805TeX. For example, you can change the coding from Mazovia to
6806ISO8859-2. Another example is a change of coding from ISO8859-2 to
6807prefix notation (in which `/a' stands for the aogonek character, for
6808instance) and vice versa.
6809
6810To use this package load it using
6811 M-x load-library [enter] ogonek
6812Then, you may get an explanation by calling one of
6813 M-x ogonek-jak -- in Polish
6814 M-x ogonek-how -- in English
6815The info specifies the commands and variables provided as well as the
6816ways of customization in `.emacs'.
6817
6818*** Interface to ph.
6819
6820Emacs provides a client interface to CCSO Nameservers (ph/qi)
6821
6822The CCSO nameserver is used in many universities to provide directory
6823services about people. ph.el provides a convenient Emacs interface to
6824these servers.
6825
6826*** uce.el is useful for replying to unsolicited commercial email.
6827
6828*** vcursor.el implements a "virtual cursor" feature.
6829You can move the virtual cursor with special commands
6830while the real cursor does not move.
6831
6832*** webjump.el is a "hot list" package which you can set up
6833for visiting your favorite web sites.
6834
6835*** M-x winner-mode is a minor mode which saves window configurations,
6836so you can move back to other configurations that you have recently used.
6837
6838** movemail change
6839
6840Movemail no longer needs to be installed setuid root in order for POP
6841mail retrieval to function properly. This is because it no longer
6842supports the RPOP (reserved-port POP) protocol; instead, it uses the
6843user's POP password to authenticate to the mail server.
6844
6845This change was made earlier, but not reported in NEWS before.
6846\f
6847* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows.
6848
6849** Changes in handling MS-DOS/MS-Windows text files.
6850
6851Emacs handles three different conventions for representing
6852end-of-line: CRLF for MSDOS, LF for Unix and GNU, and CR (used on the
6853Macintosh). Emacs determines which convention is used in a specific
6854file based on the contents of that file (except for certain special
6855file names), and when it saves the file, it uses the same convention.
6856
6857To save the file and change the end-of-line convention, you can use
6858C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) to specify a different
6859coding system for the buffer. Then, when you save the file, the newly
6860specified coding system will take effect. For example, to save with
6861LF, specify undecided-unix (or some other ...-unix coding system); to
6862save with CRLF, specify undecided-dos.
6863\f
6864* Lisp Changes in Emacs 20.1
6865
6866** Byte-compiled files made with Emacs 20 will, in general, work in
6867Emacs 19 as well, as long as the source code runs in Emacs 19. And
6868vice versa: byte-compiled files made with Emacs 19 should also run in
6869Emacs 20, as long as the program itself works in Emacs 20.
6870
6871** Windows-specific functions and variables have been renamed
6872to start with w32- instead of win32-.
6873
6874In hacker language, calling something a "win" is a form of praise. We
6875don't want to praise a non-free Microsoft system, so we don't call it
6876"win".
6877
6878** Basic Lisp changes
6879
6880*** A symbol whose name starts with a colon now automatically
6881evaluates to itself. Therefore such a symbol can be used as a constant.
6882
6883*** The defined purpose of `defconst' has been changed. It should now
6884be used only for values that should not be changed whether by a program
6885or by the user.
6886
6887The actual behavior of defconst has not been changed.
6888
6889*** There are new macros `when' and `unless'
6890
6891(when CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION (progn BODY...))
6892(unless CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION nil BODY...)
6893
6894*** Emacs now defines functions caar, cadr, cdar and cddr with their
6895usual Lisp meanings. For example, caar returns the car of the car of
6896its argument.
6897
6898*** equal, when comparing strings, now ignores their text properties.
6899
6900*** The new function `functionp' tests whether an object is a function.
6901
6902*** arrayp now returns t for char-tables and bool-vectors.
6903
6904*** Certain primitives which use characters (as integers) now get an
6905error if the integer is not a valid character code. These primitives
6906include insert-char, char-to-string, and the %c construct in the
6907`format' function.
6908
6909*** The `require' function now insists on adding a suffix, either .el
6910or .elc, to the file name. Thus, (require 'foo) will not use a file
6911whose name is just foo. It insists on foo.el or foo.elc.
6912
6913*** The `autoload' function, when the file name does not contain
6914either a directory name or the suffix .el or .elc, insists on
6915adding one of these suffixes.
6916
6917*** string-to-number now takes an optional second argument BASE
6918which specifies the base to use when converting an integer.
6919If BASE is omitted, base 10 is used.
6920
6921We have not implemented other radices for floating point numbers,
6922because that would be much more work and does not seem useful.
6923
6924*** substring now handles vectors as well as strings.
6925
6926*** The Common Lisp function eql is no longer defined normally.
6927You must load the `cl' library to define it.
6928
6929*** The new macro `with-current-buffer' lets you evaluate an expression
6930conveniently with a different current buffer. It looks like this:
6931
6932 (with-current-buffer BUFFER BODY-FORMS...)
6933
6934BUFFER is the expression that says which buffer to use.
6935BODY-FORMS say what to do in that buffer.
6936
6937*** The new primitive `save-current-buffer' saves and restores the
6938choice of current buffer, like `save-excursion', but without saving or
6939restoring the value of point or the mark. `with-current-buffer'
6940works using `save-current-buffer'.
6941
6942*** The new macro `with-temp-file' lets you do some work in a new buffer and
6943write the output to a specified file. Like `progn', it returns the value
6944of the last form.
6945
6946*** The new macro `with-temp-buffer' lets you do some work in a new buffer,
6947which is discarded after use. Like `progn', it returns the value of the
6948last form. If you wish to return the buffer contents, use (buffer-string)
6949as the last form.
6950
6951*** The new function split-string takes a string, splits it at certain
6952characters, and returns a list of the substrings in between the
6953matches.
6954
6955For example, (split-string "foo bar lose" " +") returns ("foo" "bar" "lose").
6956
6957*** The new macro with-output-to-string executes some Lisp expressions
6958with standard-output set up so that all output feeds into a string.
6959Then it returns that string.
6960
6961For example, if the current buffer name is `foo',
6962
6963(with-output-to-string
6964 (princ "The buffer is ")
6965 (princ (buffer-name)))
6966
6967returns "The buffer is foo".
6968
6969** Non-ASCII characters are now supported, if enable-multibyte-characters
6970is non-nil.
6971
6972These characters have character codes above 256. When inserted in the
6973buffer or stored in a string, they are represented as multibyte
6974characters that occupy several buffer positions each.
6975
6976*** When enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, a single character in
6977a buffer or string can be two or more bytes (as many as four).
6978
6979Buffers and strings are still made up of unibyte elements;
6980character positions and string indices are always measured in bytes.
6981Therefore, moving forward one character can increase the buffer
6982position by 2, 3 or 4. The function forward-char moves by whole
6983characters, and therefore is no longer equivalent to
6984 (lambda (n) (goto-char (+ (point) n))).
6985
6986ASCII characters (codes 0 through 127) are still single bytes, always.
6987Sequences of byte values 128 through 255 are used to represent
6988non-ASCII characters. These sequences are called "multibyte
6989characters".
6990
6991The first byte of a multibyte character is always in the range 128
6992through 159 (octal 0200 through 0237). These values are called
6993"leading codes". The second and subsequent bytes are always in the
6994range 160 through 255 (octal 0240 through 0377). The first byte, the
6995leading code, determines how many bytes long the sequence is.
6996
6997*** The function forward-char moves over characters, and therefore
6998(forward-char 1) may increase point by more than 1 if it moves over a
6999multibyte character. Likewise, delete-char always deletes a
7000character, which may be more than one buffer position.
7001
7002This means that some Lisp programs, which assume that a character is
7003always one buffer position, need to be changed.
7004
7005However, all ASCII characters are always one buffer position.
7006
7007*** The regexp [\200-\377] no longer matches all non-ASCII characters,
7008because when enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, these characters
7009have codes that are not in the range octal 200 to octal 377. However,
7010the regexp [^\000-\177] does match all non-ASCII characters,
7011guaranteed.
7012
7013*** The function char-boundary-p returns non-nil if position POS is
7014between two characters in the buffer (not in the middle of a
7015character).
7016
7017When the value is non-nil, it says what kind of character follows POS:
7018
7019 0 if POS is at an ASCII character or at the end of range,
7020 1 if POS is before a 2-byte length multi-byte form,
7021 2 if POS is at a head of 3-byte length multi-byte form,
7022 3 if POS is at a head of 4-byte length multi-byte form,
7023 4 if POS is at a head of multi-byte form of a composite character.
7024
7025*** The function char-bytes returns how many bytes the character CHAR uses.
7026
7027*** Strings can contain multibyte characters. The function
7028`length' returns the string length counting bytes, which may be
7029more than the number of characters.
7030
7031You can include a multibyte character in a string constant by writing
7032it literally. You can also represent it with a hex escape,
7033\xNNNNNNN..., using as many digits as necessary. Any character which
7034is not a valid hex digit terminates this construct. If you want to
7035follow it with a character that is a hex digit, write backslash and
7036newline in between; that will terminate the hex escape.
7037
7038*** The function concat-chars takes arguments which are characters
7039and returns a string containing those characters.
7040
7041*** The function sref access a multibyte character in a string.
7042(sref STRING INDX) returns the character in STRING at INDEX. INDEX
7043counts from zero. If INDEX is at a position in the middle of a
7044character, sref signals an error.
7045
7046*** The function chars-in-string returns the number of characters
7047in a string. This is less than the length of the string, if the
7048string contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
7049
7050*** The function chars-in-region returns the number of characters
7051in a region from BEG to END. This is less than (- END BEG) if the
7052region contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
7053
7054*** The function string-to-list converts a string to a list of
7055the characters in it. string-to-vector converts a string
7056to a vector of the characters in it.
7057
7058*** The function store-substring alters part of the contents
7059of a string. You call it as follows:
7060
7061 (store-substring STRING IDX OBJ)
7062
7063This says to alter STRING, by storing OBJ starting at index IDX in
7064STRING. OBJ may be either a character or a (smaller) string.
7065This function really does alter the contents of STRING.
7066Since it is impossible to change the length of an existing string,
7067it is an error if OBJ doesn't fit within STRING's actual length.
7068
7069*** char-width returns the width (in columns) of the character CHAR,
7070if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
7071
7072*** string-width returns the width (in columns) of the text in STRING,
7073if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
7074
7075*** truncate-string-to-width shortens a string, if necessary,
7076to fit within a certain number of columns. (Of course, it does
7077not alter the string that you give it; it returns a new string
7078which contains all or just part of the existing string.)
7079
7080(truncate-string-to-width STR END-COLUMN &optional START-COLUMN PADDING)
7081
7082This returns the part of STR up to column END-COLUMN.
7083
7084The optional argument START-COLUMN specifies the starting column.
7085If this is non-nil, then the first START-COLUMN columns of the string
7086are not included in the resulting value.
7087
7088The optional argument PADDING, if non-nil, is a padding character to be added
7089at the beginning and end the resulting string, to extend it to exactly
7090WIDTH columns. If PADDING is nil, that means do not pad; then, if STRING
7091is narrower than WIDTH, the value is equal to STRING.
7092
7093If PADDING and START-COLUMN are both non-nil, and if there is no clean
7094place in STRING that corresponds to START-COLUMN (because one
7095character extends across that column), then the padding character
7096PADDING is added one or more times at the beginning of the result
7097string, so that its columns line up as if it really did start at
7098column START-COLUMN.
7099
7100*** When the functions in the list after-change-functions are called,
7101the third argument is the number of bytes in the pre-change text, not
7102necessarily the number of characters. It is, in effect, the
7103difference in buffer position between the beginning and the end of the
7104changed text, before the change.
7105
7106*** The characters Emacs uses are classified in various character
7107sets, each of which has a name which is a symbol. In general there is
7108one character set for each script, not for each language.
7109
7110**** The function charsetp tests whether an object is a character set name.
7111
7112**** The variable charset-list holds a list of character set names.
7113
7114**** char-charset, given a character code, returns the name of the character
7115set that the character belongs to. (The value is a symbol.)
7116
7117**** split-char, given a character code, returns a list containing the
7118name of the character set, followed by one or two byte-values
7119which identify the character within that character set.
7120
7121**** make-char, given a character set name and one or two subsequent
7122byte-values, constructs a character code. This is roughly the
7123opposite of split-char.
7124
7125**** find-charset-region returns a list of the character sets
7126of all the characters between BEG and END.
7127
7128**** find-charset-string returns a list of the character sets
7129of all the characters in a string.
7130
7131*** Here are the Lisp facilities for working with coding systems
7132and specifying coding systems.
7133
7134**** The function coding-system-list returns a list of all coding
7135system names (symbols). With optional argument t, it returns a list
7136of all distinct base coding systems, not including variants.
7137(Variant coding systems are those like latin-1-dos, latin-1-unix
7138and latin-1-mac which specify the end-of-line conversion as well
7139as what to do about code conversion.)
7140
7141**** coding-system-p tests a symbol to see if it is a coding system
7142name. It returns t if so, nil if not.
7143
7144**** file-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
7145for certain file names. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
7146except that the PATTERN is matched against the file name.
7147
7148Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
7149which file names the element applies to. PATTERN should be a regexp
7150to match against a file name.
7151
7152VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
7153a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
7154decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
7155to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
7156systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
7157specifies the coding system for encoding.
7158
7159If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
7160or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
7161
7162**** The variable network-coding-system-alist specifies
7163the coding system to use for network sockets.
7164
7165Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
7166which network sockets the element applies to. PATTERN should be
7167either a port number or a regular expression matching some network
7168service names.
7169
7170VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
7171a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
7172decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
7173to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
7174systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
7175specifies the coding system for encoding.
7176
7177If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
7178or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
7179
7180**** process-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
7181for certain subprocess. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
7182except that the PATTERN is matched against the program name used to
7183start the subprocess.
7184
7185**** The variable default-process-coding-system specifies the coding
7186systems to use for subprocess (and net connection) input and output,
7187when nothing else specifies what to do. The value is a cons cell
7188(OUTPUT-CODING . INPUT-CODING). OUTPUT-CODING applies to output
7189to the subprocess, and INPUT-CODING applies to input from it.
7190
7191**** The variable coding-system-for-write, if non-nil, specifies the
7192coding system to use for writing a file, or for output to a synchronous
7193subprocess.
7194
7195It also applies to any asynchronous subprocess or network connection,
7196but in a different way: the value of coding-system-for-write when you
7197start the subprocess or connection affects that subprocess or
7198connection permanently or until overridden.
7199
7200The variable coding-system-for-write takes precedence over
7201file-coding-system-alist, process-coding-system-alist and
7202network-coding-system-alist, and all other methods of specifying a
7203coding system for output. But most of the time this variable is nil.
7204It exists so that Lisp programs can bind it to a specific coding
7205system for one operation at a time.
7206
7207**** coding-system-for-read applies similarly to input from
7208files, subprocesses or network connections.
7209
7210**** The function process-coding-system tells you what
7211coding systems(s) an existing subprocess is using.
7212The value is a cons cell,
7213 (DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM . ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM)
7214where DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for decoding output from
7215the subprocess, and ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for encoding
7216input to the subprocess.
7217
7218**** The function set-process-coding-system can be used to
7219change the coding systems in use for an existing subprocess.
7220
7221** Emacs has a new facility to help users manage the many
7222customization options. To make a Lisp program work with this facility,
7223you need to use the new macros defgroup and defcustom.
7224
7225You use defcustom instead of defvar, for defining a user option
7226variable. The difference is that you specify two additional pieces of
7227information (usually): the "type" which says what values are
7228legitimate, and the "group" which specifies the hierarchy for
7229customization.
7230
7231Thus, instead of writing
7232
7233 (defvar foo-blurgoze nil
7234 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely.")
7235
7236you would now write this:
7237
7238 (defcustom foo-blurgoze nil
7239 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely."
7240 :type 'boolean
7241 :group foo)
7242
7243The type `boolean' means that this variable has only
7244two meaningful states: nil and non-nil. Other type values
7245describe other possibilities; see the manual for Custom
7246for a description of them.
7247
7248The "group" argument is used to specify a group which the option
7249should belong to. You define a new group like this:
7250
7251 (defgroup ispell nil
7252 "Spell checking using Ispell."
7253 :group 'processes)
7254
7255The "group" argument in defgroup specifies the parent group. The root
7256group is called `emacs'; it should not contain any variables itself,
7257but only other groups. The immediate subgroups of `emacs' correspond
7258to the keywords used by C-h p. Under these subgroups come
7259second-level subgroups that belong to individual packages.
7260
7261Each Emacs package should have its own set of groups. A simple
7262package should have just one group; a more complex package should
7263have a hierarchy of its own groups. The sole or root group of a
7264package should be a subgroup of one or more of the "keyword"
7265first-level subgroups.
7266
7267** New `widget' library for inserting UI components in buffers.
7268
7269This library, used by the new custom library, is documented in a
7270separate manual that accompanies Emacs.
7271
7272** easy-mmode
7273
7274The easy-mmode package provides macros and functions that make
7275developing minor modes easier. Roughly, the programmer has to code
7276only the functionality of the minor mode. All the rest--toggles,
7277predicate, and documentation--can be done in one call to the macro
7278`easy-mmode-define-minor-mode' (see the documentation). See also
7279`easy-mmode-define-keymap'.
7280
7281** Text property changes
7282
7283*** The `intangible' property now works on overlays as well as on a
7284text property.
7285
7286*** The new functions next-char-property-change and
7287previous-char-property-change scan through the buffer looking for a
7288place where either a text property or an overlay might change. The
7289functions take two arguments, POSITION and LIMIT. POSITION is the
7290starting position for the scan. LIMIT says where to stop the scan.
7291
7292If no property change is found before LIMIT, the value is LIMIT. If
7293LIMIT is nil, scan goes to the beginning or end of the accessible part
7294of the buffer. If no property change is found, the value is the
7295position of the beginning or end of the buffer.
7296
7297*** In the `local-map' text property or overlay property, the property
7298value can now be a symbol whose function definition is a keymap. This
7299is an alternative to using the keymap itself.
7300
7301** Changes in invisibility features
7302
7303*** Isearch can now temporarily show parts of the buffer which are
7304hidden by an overlay with a invisible property, when the search match
7305is inside that portion of the buffer. To enable this the overlay
7306should have a isearch-open-invisible property which is a function that
7307would be called having the overlay as an argument, the function should
7308make the overlay visible.
7309
7310During incremental search the overlays are shown by modifying the
7311invisible and intangible properties, if beside this more actions are
7312needed the overlay should have a isearch-open-invisible-temporary
7313which is a function. The function is called with 2 arguments: one is
7314the overlay and the second is nil when it should show the overlay and
7315t when it should hide it.
7316
7317*** add-to-invisibility-spec, remove-from-invisibility-spec
7318
7319Modes that use overlays to hide portions of a buffer should set the
7320invisible property of the overlay to the mode's name (or another symbol)
7321and modify the `buffer-invisibility-spec' to include that symbol.
7322Use `add-to-invisibility-spec' and `remove-from-invisibility-spec' to
7323manipulate the `buffer-invisibility-spec'.
7324Here is an example of how to do this:
7325
7326 ;; If we want to display an ellipsis:
7327 (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
7328 ;; If you don't want ellipsis:
7329 (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
7330
7331 ...
7332 (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end) 'invisible 'my-symbol)
7333
7334 ...
7335 ;; When done with the overlays:
7336 (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
7337 ;; Or respectively:
7338 (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
7339
7340** Changes in syntax parsing.
7341
7342*** The syntax-directed buffer-scan functions (such as
7343`parse-partial-sexp', `forward-word' and similar functions) can now
7344obey syntax information specified by text properties, if the variable
7345`parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil.
7346
7347If the value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is nil, the behavior
7348is as before: the syntax-table of the current buffer is always
7349used to determine the syntax of the character at the position.
7350
7351When `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil, the syntax of a
7352character in the buffer is calculated thus:
7353
7354 a) if the `syntax-table' text-property of that character
7355 is a cons, this cons becomes the syntax-type;
7356
7357 Valid values of `syntax-table' text-property are: nil, a valid
7358 syntax-table, and a valid syntax-table element, i.e.,
7359 a cons cell of the form (SYNTAX-CODE . MATCHING-CHAR).
7360
7361 b) if the character's `syntax-table' text-property
7362 is a syntax table, this syntax table is used
7363 (instead of the syntax-table of the current buffer) to
7364 determine the syntax type of the character.
7365
7366 c) otherwise the syntax-type is determined by the syntax-table
7367 of the current buffer.
7368
7369*** The meaning of \s in regular expressions is also affected by the
7370value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties'. The details are the same as
7371for the syntax-directed buffer-scan functions.
7372
7373*** There are two new syntax-codes, `!' and `|' (numeric values 14
7374and 15). A character with a code `!' starts a comment which is ended
7375only by another character with the same code (unless quoted). A
7376character with a code `|' starts a string which is ended only by
7377another character with the same code (unless quoted).
7378
7379These codes are mainly meant for use as values of the `syntax-table'
7380text property.
7381
7382*** The function `parse-partial-sexp' has new semantics for the sixth
7383arg COMMENTSTOP. If it is `syntax-table', parse stops after the start
7384of a comment or a string, or after end of a comment or a string.
7385
7386*** The state-list which the return value from `parse-partial-sexp'
7387(and can also be used as an argument) now has an optional ninth
7388element: the character address of the start of last comment or string;
7389nil if none. The fourth and eighth elements have special values if the
7390string/comment is started by a "!" or "|" syntax-code.
7391
7392*** Since new features of `parse-partial-sexp' allow a complete
7393syntactic parsing, `font-lock' no longer supports
7394`font-lock-comment-start-regexp'.
7395
7396** Changes in face features
7397
7398*** The face functions are now unconditionally defined in Emacs, even
7399if it does not support displaying on a device that supports faces.
7400
7401*** The function face-documentation returns the documentation string
7402of a face (or nil if it doesn't have one).
7403
7404*** The function face-bold-p returns t if a face should be bold.
7405set-face-bold-p sets that flag.
7406
7407*** The function face-italic-p returns t if a face should be italic.
7408set-face-italic-p sets that flag.
7409
7410*** You can now specify foreground and background colors for text
7411by adding elements of the form (foreground-color . COLOR-NAME)
7412and (background-color . COLOR-NAME) to the list of faces in
7413the `face' property (either the character's text property or an
7414overlay property).
7415
7416This means that you no longer need to create named faces to use
7417arbitrary colors in a Lisp package.
7418
7419** Changes in file-handling functions
7420
7421*** File-access primitive functions no longer discard an extra redundant
7422directory name from the beginning of the file name. In other words,
7423they no longer do anything special with // or /~. That conversion
7424is now done only in substitute-in-file-name.
7425
7426This makes it possible for a Lisp program to open a file whose name
7427begins with ~.
7428
7429*** If copy-file is unable to set the date of the output file,
7430it now signals an error with the condition file-date-error.
7431
7432*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
7433the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a list of integers.
7434
7435*** insert-file-contents can now read from a special file,
7436as long as the arguments VISIT and REPLACE are nil.
7437
7438*** The RAWFILE arg to find-file-noselect, if non-nil, now suppresses
7439character code conversion as well as other things.
7440
7441Meanwhile, this feature does work with remote file names
7442(formerly it did not).
7443
7444*** Lisp packages which create temporary files should use the TMPDIR
7445environment variable to decide which directory to put them in.
7446
7447*** interpreter-mode-alist elements now specify regexps
7448instead of constant strings.
7449
7450*** expand-file-name no longer treats `//' or `/~' specially. It used
7451to delete all the text of a file name up through the first slash of
7452any `//' or `/~' sequence. Now it passes them straight through.
7453
7454substitute-in-file-name continues to treat those sequences specially,
7455in the same way as before.
7456
7457*** The variable `format-alist' is more general now.
7458The FROM-FN and TO-FN in a format definition can now be strings
7459which specify shell commands to use as filters to perform conversion.
7460
7461*** The new function access-file tries to open a file, and signals an
7462error if that fails. If the open succeeds, access-file does nothing
7463else, and returns nil.
7464
7465*** The function insert-directory now signals an error if the specified
7466directory cannot be listed.
7467
7468** Changes in minibuffer input
7469
7470*** The functions read-buffer, read-variable, read-command, read-string
7471read-file-name, read-from-minibuffer and completing-read now take an
7472additional argument which specifies the default value. If this
7473argument is non-nil, it should be a string; that string is used in two
7474ways:
7475
7476 It is returned if the user enters empty input.
7477 It is available through the history command M-n.
7478
7479*** The functions read-string, read-from-minibuffer,
7480read-no-blanks-input and completing-read now take an additional
7481argument INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. If this is non-nil, then the
7482minibuffer inherits the current input method and the setting of
7483enable-multibyte-characters from the previously current buffer.
7484
7485In an interactive spec, you can use M instead of s to read an
7486argument in this way.
7487
7488*** All minibuffer input functions discard text properties
7489from the text you enter in the minibuffer, unless the variable
7490minibuffer-allow-text-properties is non-nil.
7491
7492** Echo area features
7493
7494*** Clearing the echo area now runs the normal hook
7495echo-area-clear-hook. Note that the echo area can be used while the
7496minibuffer is active; in that case, the minibuffer is still active
7497after the echo area is cleared.
7498
7499*** The function current-message returns the message currently displayed
7500in the echo area, or nil if there is none.
7501
7502** Keyboard input features
7503
7504*** tty-erase-char is a new variable that reports which character was
7505set up as the terminal's erase character when time Emacs was started.
7506
7507*** num-nonmacro-input-events is the total number of input events
7508received so far from the terminal. It does not count those generated
7509by keyboard macros.
7510
7511** Frame-related changes
7512
7513*** make-frame runs the normal hook before-make-frame-hook just before
7514creating a frame, and just after creating a frame it runs the abnormal
7515hook after-make-frame-functions with the new frame as arg.
7516
7517*** The new hook window-configuration-change-hook is now run every time
7518the window configuration has changed. The frame whose configuration
7519has changed is the selected frame when the hook is run.
7520
7521*** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
7522selected buffers, in its buffer-list frame parameter, so that the
7523value of other-buffer is now based on the buffers recently displayed
7524in the selected frame.
7525
7526*** The value of the frame parameter vertical-scroll-bars
7527is now `left', `right' or nil. A non-nil value specifies
7528which side of the window to put the scroll bars on.
7529
7530** X Windows features
7531
7532*** You can examine X resources for other applications by binding
7533x-resource-class around a call to x-get-resource. The usual value of
7534x-resource-class is "Emacs", which is the correct value for Emacs.
7535
7536*** In menus, checkboxes and radio buttons now actually work.
7537The menu displays the current status of the box or button.
7538
7539*** The function x-list-fonts now takes an optional fourth argument
7540MAXIMUM which sets a limit on how many matching fonts to return.
7541A smaller value of MAXIMUM makes the function faster.
7542
7543If the only question is whether *any* font matches the pattern,
7544it is good to supply 1 for this argument.
7545
7546** Subprocess features
7547
7548*** A reminder: it is no longer necessary for subprocess filter
7549functions and sentinels to do save-match-data, because Emacs does this
7550automatically.
7551
7552*** The new function shell-command-to-string executes a shell command
7553and returns the output from the command as a string.
7554
7555*** The new function process-contact returns t for a child process,
7556and (HOSTNAME SERVICE) for a net connection.
7557
7558** An error in running pre-command-hook or post-command-hook
7559does clear the variable to nil. The documentation was wrong before.
7560
7561** In define-key-after, if AFTER is t, the new binding now always goes
7562at the end of the keymap. If the keymap is a menu, this means it
7563goes after the other menu items.
7564
7565** If you have a program that makes several changes in the same area
7566of the buffer, you can use the macro combine-after-change-calls
7567around that Lisp code to make it faster when after-change hooks
7568are in use.
7569
7570The macro arranges to call the after-change functions just once for a
7571series of several changes--if that seems safe.
7572
7573Don't alter the variables after-change-functions and
7574after-change-function within the body of a combine-after-change-calls
7575form.
7576
7577** If you define an abbrev (with define-abbrev) whose EXPANSION
7578is not a string, then the abbrev does not expand in the usual sense,
7579but its hook is still run.
7580
7581** Normally, the Lisp debugger is not used (even if you have enabled it)
7582for errors that are handled by condition-case.
7583
7584If you set debug-on-signal to a non-nil value, then the debugger is called
7585regardless of whether there is a handler for the condition. This is
7586useful for debugging problems that happen inside of a condition-case.
7587
7588This mode of operation seems to be unreliable in other ways. Errors that
7589are normal and ought to be handled, perhaps in timers or process
7590filters, will instead invoke the debugger. So don't say you weren't
7591warned.
7592
7593** The new variable ring-bell-function lets you specify your own
7594way for Emacs to "ring the bell".
7595
7596** If run-at-time's TIME argument is t, the action is repeated at
7597integral multiples of REPEAT from the epoch; this is useful for
7598functions like display-time.
7599
7600** You can use the function locate-library to find the precise file
7601name of a Lisp library. This isn't new, but wasn't documented before.
7602
7603** Commands for entering view mode have new optional arguments that
7604can be used from Lisp. Low-level entrance to and exit from view mode
7605is done by functions view-mode-enter and view-mode-exit.
7606
7607** batch-byte-compile-file now makes Emacs return a nonzero status code
7608if there is an error in compilation.
7609
7610** pop-to-buffer, switch-to-buffer-other-window and
7611switch-to-buffer-other-frame now accept an additional optional
7612argument NORECORD, much like switch-to-buffer. If it is non-nil,
7613they don't put the buffer at the front of the buffer list.
7614
7615** If your .emacs file leaves the *scratch* buffer non-empty,
7616Emacs does not display the startup message, so as to avoid changing
7617the *scratch* buffer.
7618
7619** The new function regexp-opt returns an efficient regexp to match a string.
7620The arguments are STRINGS and (optionally) PAREN. This function can be used
7621where regexp matching or searching is intensively used and speed is important,
7622e.g., in Font Lock mode.
7623
7624** The variable buffer-display-count is local to each buffer,
7625and is incremented each time the buffer is displayed in a window.
7626It starts at 0 when the buffer is created.
7627
7628** The new function compose-mail starts composing a mail message
7629using the user's chosen mail composition agent (specified with the
7630variable mail-user-agent). It has variants compose-mail-other-window
7631and compose-mail-other-frame.
7632
7633** The `user-full-name' function now takes an optional parameter which
7634can either be a number (the UID) or a string (the login name). The
7635full name of the specified user will be returned.
7636
7637** Lisp packages that load files of customizations, or any other sort
7638of user profile, should obey the variable init-file-user in deciding
7639where to find it. They should load the profile of the user name found
7640in that variable. If init-file-user is nil, meaning that the -q
7641option was used, then Lisp packages should not load the customization
7642files at all.
7643
7644** format-time-string now allows you to specify the field width
7645and type of padding. This works as in printf: you write the field
7646width as digits in the middle of a %-construct. If you start
7647the field width with 0, it means to pad with zeros.
7648
7649For example, %S normally specifies the number of seconds since the
7650minute; %03S means to pad this with zeros to 3 positions, %_3S to pad
7651with spaces to 3 positions. Plain %3S pads with zeros, because that
7652is how %S normally pads to two positions.
7653
7654** thing-at-point now supports a new kind of "thing": url.
7655
7656** imenu.el changes.
7657
7658You can now specify a function to be run when selecting an
7659item from menu created by imenu.
7660
7661An example of using this feature: if we define imenu items for the
7662#include directives in a C file, we can open the included file when we
7663select one of those items.
7664\f
7665* Emacs 19.34 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
7666\f
7667* Changes in Emacs 19.33.
7668
7669** Bibtex mode no longer turns on Auto Fill automatically. (No major
7670mode should do that--it is the user's choice.)
7671
7672** The variable normal-auto-fill-function specifies the function to
7673use for auto-fill-function, if and when Auto Fill is turned on.
7674Major modes can set this locally to alter how Auto Fill works.
7675\f
7676* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.32
7677
7678** C-x f with no argument now signals an error.
7679To set the fill column at the current column, use C-u C-x f.
7680
7681** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
7682conversion. If you type the abbreviation with mixed case, and it
7683matches the beginning of the expansion including case, then the
7684expansion is copied verbatim. Using SPC M-/ to copy an additional
7685word always copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is
7686all caps.
7687
7688** On a non-windowing terminal, which can display only one Emacs frame
7689at a time, creating a new frame with C-x 5 2 also selects that frame.
7690
7691When using a display that can show multiple frames at once, C-x 5 2
7692does make the frame visible, but does not select it. This is the same
7693as in previous Emacs versions.
7694
7695** You can use C-x 5 2 to create multiple frames on MSDOS, just as on a
7696non-X terminal on Unix. Of course, only one frame is visible at any
7697time, since your terminal doesn't have the ability to display multiple
7698frames.
7699
7700** On Windows, set win32-pass-alt-to-system to a non-nil value
7701if you would like tapping the Alt key to invoke the Windows menu.
7702This feature is not enabled by default; since the Alt key is also the
7703Meta key, it is too easy and painful to activate this feature by
7704accident.
7705
7706** The command apply-macro-to-region-lines repeats the last defined
7707keyboard macro once for each complete line within the current region.
7708It does this line by line, by moving point to the beginning of that
7709line and then executing the macro.
7710
7711This command is not new, but was never documented before.
7712
7713** You can now use Mouse-1 to place the region around a string constant
7714(something surrounded by doublequote characters or other delimiter
7715characters of like syntax) by double-clicking on one of the delimiting
7716characters.
7717
7718** Font Lock mode
7719
7720*** Font Lock support modes
7721
7722Font Lock can be configured to use Fast Lock mode and Lazy Lock mode (see
7723below) in a flexible way. Rather than adding the appropriate function to the
7724hook font-lock-mode-hook, you can use the new variable font-lock-support-mode
7725to control which modes have Fast Lock mode or Lazy Lock mode turned on when
7726Font Lock mode is enabled.
7727
7728For example, to use Fast Lock mode when Font Lock mode is turned on, put:
7729
7730 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'fast-lock-mode)
7731
7732in your ~/.emacs.
7733
7734*** lazy-lock
7735
7736The lazy-lock package speeds up Font Lock mode by making fontification occur
7737only when necessary, such as when a previously unfontified part of the buffer
7738becomes visible in a window. When you create a buffer with Font Lock mode and
7739Lazy Lock mode turned on, the buffer is not fontified. When certain events
7740occur (such as scrolling), Lazy Lock makes sure that the visible parts of the
7741buffer are fontified. Lazy Lock also defers on-the-fly fontification until
7742Emacs has been idle for a given amount of time.
7743
7744To use this package, put in your ~/.emacs:
7745
7746 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'lazy-lock-mode)
7747
7748To control the package behaviour, see the documentation for `lazy-lock-mode'.
7749
7750** Changes in BibTeX mode.
7751
7752*** For all entries allow spaces and tabs between opening brace or
7753paren and key.
7754
7755*** Non-escaped double-quoted characters (as in `Sch"of') are now
7756supported.
7757
7758** Gnus changes.
7759
7760Gnus, the Emacs news reader, has undergone further rewriting. Many new
7761commands and variables have been added. There should be no
7762significant incompatibilities between this Gnus version and the
7763previously released version, except in the message composition area.
7764
7765Below is a list of the more user-visible changes. Coding changes
7766between Gnus 5.1 and 5.2 are more extensive.
7767
7768*** A new message composition mode is used. All old customization
7769variables for mail-mode, rnews-reply-mode and gnus-msg are now
7770obsolete.
7771
7772*** Gnus is now able to generate "sparse" threads -- threads where
7773missing articles are represented by empty nodes.
7774
7775 (setq gnus-build-sparse-threads 'some)
7776
7777*** Outgoing articles are stored on a special archive server.
7778
7779 To disable this: (setq gnus-message-archive-group nil)
7780
7781*** Partial thread regeneration now happens when articles are
7782referred.
7783
7784*** Gnus can make use of GroupLens predictions:
7785
7786 (setq gnus-use-grouplens t)
7787
7788*** A trn-line tree buffer can be displayed.
7789
7790 (setq gnus-use-trees t)
7791
7792*** An nn-like pick-and-read minor mode is available for the summary
7793buffers.
7794
7795 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-mode-hook 'gnus-pick-mode)
7796
7797*** In binary groups you can use a special binary minor mode:
7798
7799 `M-x gnus-binary-mode'
7800
7801*** Groups can be grouped in a folding topic hierarchy.
7802
7803 (add-hook 'gnus-group-mode-hook 'gnus-topic-mode)
7804
7805*** Gnus can re-send and bounce mail.
7806
7807 Use the `S D r' and `S D b'.
7808
7809*** Groups can now have a score, and bubbling based on entry frequency
7810is possible.
7811
7812 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-exit-hook 'gnus-summary-bubble-group)
7813
7814*** Groups can be process-marked, and commands can be performed on
7815groups of groups.
7816
7817*** Caching is possible in virtual groups.
7818
7819*** nndoc now understands all kinds of digests, mail boxes, rnews news
7820batches, ClariNet briefs collections, and just about everything else.
7821
7822*** Gnus has a new backend (nnsoup) to create/read SOUP packets.
7823
7824*** The Gnus cache is much faster.
7825
7826*** Groups can be sorted according to many criteria.
7827
7828 For instance: (setq gnus-group-sort-function 'gnus-group-sort-by-rank)
7829
7830*** New group parameters have been introduced to set list-address and
7831expiration times.
7832
7833*** All formatting specs allow specifying faces to be used.
7834
7835*** There are several more commands for setting/removing/acting on
7836process marked articles on the `M P' submap.
7837
7838*** The summary buffer can be limited to show parts of the available
7839articles based on a wide range of criteria. These commands have been
7840bound to keys on the `/' submap.
7841
7842*** Articles can be made persistent -- as an alternative to saving
7843articles with the `*' command.
7844
7845*** All functions for hiding article elements are now toggles.
7846
7847*** Article headers can be buttonized.
7848
7849 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-add-buttons-to-head)
7850
7851*** All mail backends support fetching articles by Message-ID.
7852
7853*** Duplicate mail can now be treated properly. See the
7854`nnmail-treat-duplicates' variable.
7855
7856*** All summary mode commands are available directly from the article
7857buffer.
7858
7859*** Frames can be part of `gnus-buffer-configuration'.
7860
7861*** Mail can be re-scanned by a daemonic process.
7862
7863*** Gnus can make use of NoCeM files to filter spam.
7864
7865 (setq gnus-use-nocem t)
7866
7867*** Groups can be made permanently visible.
7868
7869 (setq gnus-permanently-visible-groups "^nnml:")
7870
7871*** Many new hooks have been introduced to make customizing easier.
7872
7873*** Gnus respects the Mail-Copies-To header.
7874
7875*** Threads can be gathered by looking at the References header.
7876
7877 (setq gnus-summary-thread-gathering-function
7878 'gnus-gather-threads-by-references)
7879
7880*** Read articles can be stored in a special backlog buffer to avoid
7881refetching.
7882
7883 (setq gnus-keep-backlog 50)
7884
7885*** A clean copy of the current article is always stored in a separate
7886buffer to allow easier treatment.
7887
7888*** Gnus can suggest where to save articles. See `gnus-split-methods'.
7889
7890*** Gnus doesn't have to do as much prompting when saving.
7891
7892 (setq gnus-prompt-before-saving t)
7893
7894*** gnus-uu can view decoded files asynchronously while fetching
7895articles.
7896
7897 (setq gnus-uu-grabbed-file-functions 'gnus-uu-grab-view)
7898
7899*** Filling in the article buffer now works properly on cited text.
7900
7901*** Hiding cited text adds buttons to toggle hiding, and how much
7902cited text to hide is now customizable.
7903
7904 (setq gnus-cited-lines-visible 2)
7905
7906*** Boring headers can be hidden.
7907
7908 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-hide-boring-headers)
7909
7910*** Default scoring values can now be set from the menu bar.
7911
7912*** Further syntax checking of outgoing articles have been added.
7913
7914The Gnus manual has been expanded. It explains all these new features
7915in greater detail.
7916\f
7917* Lisp Changes in Emacs 19.32
7918
7919** The function set-visited-file-name now accepts an optional
7920second argument NO-QUERY. If it is non-nil, then the user is not
7921asked for confirmation in the case where the specified file already
7922exists.
7923
7924** The variable print-length applies to printing vectors and bitvectors,
7925as well as lists.
7926
7927** The new function keymap-parent returns the parent keymap
7928of a given keymap.
7929
7930** The new function set-keymap-parent specifies a new parent for a
7931given keymap. The arguments are KEYMAP and PARENT. PARENT must be a
7932keymap or nil.
7933
7934** Sometimes menu keymaps use a command name, a symbol, which is really
7935an automatically generated alias for some other command, the "real"
7936name. In such a case, you should give that alias symbol a non-nil
7937menu-alias property. That property tells the menu system to look for
7938equivalent keys for the real name instead of equivalent keys for the
7939alias.
7940\f
7941* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.31
7942
7943** Freedom of the press restricted in the United States.
7944
7945Emacs has been censored in accord with the Communications Decency Act.
7946This includes removing some features of the doctor program. That law
7947was described by its supporters as a ban on pornography, but it bans
7948far more than that. The Emacs distribution has never contained any
7949pornography, but parts of it were nonetheless prohibited.
7950
7951For information on US government censorship of the Internet, and what
7952you can do to bring back freedom of the press, see the web site
7953`http://www.vtw.org/'.
7954
7955** A note about C mode indentation customization.
7956
7957The old (Emacs 19.29) ways of specifying a C indentation style
7958do not normally work in the new implementation of C mode.
7959It has its own methods of customizing indentation, which are
7960much more powerful than the old C mode. See the Editing Programs
7961chapter of the manual for details.
7962
7963However, you can load the library cc-compat to make the old
7964customization variables take effect.
7965
7966** Marking with the mouse.
7967
7968When you mark a region with the mouse, the region now remains
7969highlighted until the next input event, regardless of whether you are
7970using M-x transient-mark-mode.
7971
7972** Improved Windows NT/95 support.
7973
7974*** Emacs now supports scroll bars on Windows NT and Windows 95.
7975
7976*** Emacs now supports subprocesses on Windows 95. (Subprocesses used
7977to work on NT only and not on 95.)
7978
7979*** There are difficulties with subprocesses, though, due to problems
7980in Windows, beyond the control of Emacs. They work fine as long as
7981you run Windows applications. The problems arise when you run a DOS
7982application in a subprocesses. Since current shells run as DOS
7983applications, these problems are significant.
7984
7985If you run a DOS application in a subprocess, then the application is
7986likely to busy-wait, which means that your machine will be 100% busy.
7987However, if you don't mind the temporary heavy load, the subprocess
7988will work OK as long as you tell it to terminate before you start any
7989other DOS application as a subprocess.
7990
7991Emacs is unable to terminate or interrupt a DOS subprocess.
7992You have to do this by providing input directly to the subprocess.
7993
7994If you run two DOS applications at the same time in two separate
7995subprocesses, even if one of them is asynchronous, you will probably
7996have to reboot your machine--until then, it will remain 100% busy.
7997Windows simply does not cope when one Windows process tries to run two
7998separate DOS subprocesses. Typing CTL-ALT-DEL and then choosing
7999Shutdown seems to work although it may take a few minutes.
8000
8001** M-x resize-minibuffer-mode.
8002
8003This command, not previously mentioned in NEWS, toggles a mode in
8004which the minibuffer window expands to show as many lines as the
8005minibuffer contains.
8006
8007** `title' frame parameter and resource.
8008
8009The `title' X resource now specifies just the frame title, nothing else.
8010It does not affect the name used for looking up other X resources.
8011It works by setting the new `title' frame parameter, which likewise
8012affects just the displayed title of the frame.
8013
8014The `name' parameter continues to do what it used to do:
8015it specifies the frame name for looking up X resources,
8016and also serves as the default for the displayed title
8017when the `title' parameter is unspecified or nil.
8018
8019** Emacs now uses the X toolkit by default, if you have a new
8020enough version of X installed (X11R5 or newer).
8021
8022** When you compile Emacs with the Motif widget set, Motif handles the
8023F10 key by activating the menu bar. To avoid confusion, the usual
8024Emacs binding of F10 is replaced with a no-op when using Motif.
8025
8026If you want to be able to use F10 in Emacs, you can rebind the Motif
8027menubar to some other key which you don't use. To do so, add
8028something like this to your X resources file. This example rebinds
8029the Motif menu bar activation key to S-F12:
8030
8031 Emacs*defaultVirtualBindings: osfMenuBar : Shift<Key>F12
8032
8033** In overwrite mode, DEL now inserts spaces in most cases
8034to replace the characters it "deletes".
8035
8036** The Rmail summary now shows the number of lines in each message.
8037
8038** Rmail has a new command M-x unforward-rmail-message, which extracts
8039a forwarded message from the message that forwarded it. To use it,
8040select a message which contains a forwarded message and then type the command.
8041It inserts the forwarded message as a separate Rmail message
8042immediately after the selected one.
8043
8044This command also undoes the textual modifications that are standardly
8045made, as part of forwarding, by Rmail and other mail reader programs.
8046
8047** Turning off saving of .saves-... files in your home directory.
8048
8049Each Emacs session writes a file named .saves-... in your home
8050directory to record which files M-x recover-session should recover.
8051If you exit Emacs normally with C-x C-c, it deletes that file. If
8052Emacs or the operating system crashes, the file remains for M-x
8053recover-session.
8054
8055You can turn off the writing of these files by setting
8056auto-save-list-file-name to nil. If you do this, M-x recover-session
8057will not work.
8058
8059Some previous Emacs versions failed to delete these files even on
8060normal exit. This is fixed now. If you are thinking of turning off
8061this feature because of past experiences with versions that had this
8062bug, it would make sense to check whether you still want to do so
8063now that the bug is fixed.
8064
8065** Changes to Version Control (VC)
8066
8067There is a new variable, vc-follow-symlinks. It indicates what to do
8068when you visit a link to a file that is under version control.
8069Editing the file through the link bypasses the version control system,
8070which is dangerous and probably not what you want.
8071
8072If this variable is t, VC follows the link and visits the real file,
8073telling you about it in the echo area. If it is `ask' (the default),
8074VC asks for confirmation whether it should follow the link. If nil,
8075the link is visited and a warning displayed.
8076
8077** iso-acc.el now lets you specify a choice of language.
8078Languages include "latin-1" (the default) and "latin-2" (which
8079is designed for entering ISO Latin-2 characters).
8080
8081There are also choices for specific human languages such as French and
8082Portuguese. These are subsets of Latin-1, which differ in that they
8083enable only the accent characters needed for particular language.
8084The other accent characters, not needed for the chosen language,
8085remain normal.
8086
8087** Posting articles and sending mail now has M-TAB completion on various
8088header fields (Newsgroups, To, CC, ...).
8089
8090Completion in the Newsgroups header depends on the list of groups
8091known to your news reader. Completion in the Followup-To header
8092offers those groups which are in the Newsgroups header, since
8093Followup-To usually just holds one of those.
8094
8095Completion in fields that hold mail addresses works based on the list
8096of local users plus your aliases. Additionally, if your site provides
8097a mail directory or a specific host to use for any unrecognized user
8098name, you can arrange to query that host for completion also. (See the
8099documentation of variables `mail-directory-process' and
8100`mail-directory-stream'.)
8101
8102** A greatly extended sgml-mode offers new features such as (to be configured)
8103skeletons with completing read for tags and attributes, typing named
8104characters including optionally all 8bit characters, making tags invisible
8105with optional alternate display text, skipping and deleting tag(pair)s.
8106
8107Note: since Emacs' syntax feature cannot limit the special meaning of ', " and
8108- to inside <>, for some texts the result, especially of font locking, may be
8109wrong (see `sgml-specials' if you get wrong results).
8110
8111The derived html-mode configures this with tags and attributes more or
8112less HTML3ish. It also offers optional quick keys like C-c 1 for
8113headline or C-c u for unordered list (see `html-quick-keys'). Edit /
8114Text Properties / Face or M-g combinations create tags as applicable.
8115Outline minor mode is supported and level 1 font-locking tries to
8116fontify tag contents (which only works when they fit on one line, due
8117to a limitation in font-lock).
8118
8119External viewing via browse-url can occur automatically upon saving.
8120
8121** M-x imenu-add-to-menubar now adds to the menu bar for the current
8122buffer only. If you want to put an Imenu item in the menu bar for all
8123buffers that use a particular major mode, use the mode hook, as in
8124this example:
8125
8126 (add-hook 'emacs-lisp-mode-hook
8127 '(lambda () (imenu-add-to-menubar "Index")))
8128
8129** Changes in BibTeX mode.
8130
8131*** Field names may now contain digits, hyphens, and underscores.
8132
8133*** Font Lock mode is now supported.
8134
8135*** bibtex-make-optional-field is no longer interactive.
8136
8137*** If bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is non-nil, inserting new
8138entries is now done with a faster algorithm. However, inserting
8139will fail in this case if the buffer contains invalid entries or
8140isn't in sorted order, so you should finish each entry with C-c C-c
8141(bibtex-close-entry) after you have inserted or modified it.
8142The default value of bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is nil.
8143
8144*** Function `show-all' is no longer bound to a key, since C-u C-c C-q
8145does the same job.
8146
8147*** Entries with quotes inside quote-delimited fields (as `author =
8148"Stefan Sch{\"o}f"') are now supported.
8149
8150*** Case in field names doesn't matter anymore when searching for help
8151text.
8152
8153** Font Lock mode
8154
8155*** Global Font Lock mode
8156
8157Font Lock mode can be turned on globally, in buffers that support it, by the
8158new command global-font-lock-mode. You can use the new variable
8159font-lock-global-modes to control which modes have Font Lock mode automagically
8160turned on. By default, this variable is set so that Font Lock mode is turned
8161on globally where the buffer mode supports it.
8162
8163For example, to automagically turn on Font Lock mode where supported, put:
8164
8165 (global-font-lock-mode t)
8166
8167in your ~/.emacs.
8168
8169*** Local Refontification
8170
8171In Font Lock mode, editing a line automatically refontifies that line only.
8172However, if your change alters the syntactic context for following lines,
8173those lines remain incorrectly fontified. To refontify them, use the new
8174command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block).
8175
8176In certain major modes, M-g M-g refontifies the entire current function.
8177(The variable font-lock-mark-block-function controls how to find the
8178current function.) In other major modes, M-g M-g refontifies 16 lines
8179above and below point.
8180
8181With a prefix argument N, M-g M-g refontifies N lines above and below point.
8182
8183** Follow mode
8184
8185Follow mode is a new minor mode combining windows showing the same
8186buffer into one tall "virtual window". The windows are typically two
8187side-by-side windows. Follow mode makes them scroll together as if
8188they were a unit. To use it, go to a frame with just one window,
8189split it into two side-by-side windows using C-x 3, and then type M-x
8190follow-mode.
8191
8192M-x follow-mode turns off Follow mode if it is already enabled.
8193
8194To display two side-by-side windows and activate Follow mode, use the
8195command M-x follow-delete-other-windows-and-split.
8196
8197** hide-show changes.
8198
8199The hooks hs-hide-hooks and hs-show-hooks have been renamed
8200to hs-hide-hook and hs-show-hook, to follow the convention for
8201normal hooks.
8202
8203** Simula mode now has a menu containing the most important commands.
8204The new command simula-indent-exp is bound to C-M-q.
8205
8206** etags can now handle programs written in Erlang. Files are
8207recognised by the extensions .erl and .hrl. The tagged lines are
8208those that begin a function, record, or macro.
8209
8210** MSDOS Changes
8211
8212*** It is now possible to compile Emacs with the version 2 of DJGPP.
8213Compilation with DJGPP version 1 also still works.
8214
8215*** The documentation of DOS-specific aspects of Emacs was rewritten
8216and expanded; see the ``MS-DOS'' node in the on-line docs.
8217
8218*** Emacs now uses ~ for backup file names, not .bak.
8219
8220*** You can simulate mouse-3 on two-button mice by simultaneously
8221pressing both mouse buttons.
8222
8223*** A number of packages and commands which previously failed or had
8224restricted functionality on MS-DOS, now work. The most important ones
8225are:
8226
8227**** Printing (both with `M-x lpr-buffer' and with `ps-print' package)
8228now works.
8229
8230**** `Ediff' works (in a single-frame mode).
8231
8232**** `M-x display-time' can be used on MS-DOS (due to the new
8233implementation of Emacs timers, see below).
8234
8235**** `Dired' supports Unix-style shell wildcards.
8236
8237**** The `c-macro-expand' command now works as on other platforms.
8238
8239**** `M-x recover-session' works.
8240
8241**** `M-x list-colors-display' displays all the available colors.
8242
8243**** The `TPU-EDT' package works.
8244\f
8245* Lisp changes in Emacs 19.31.
8246
8247** The function using-unix-filesystems on Windows NT and Windows 95
8248tells Emacs to read and write files assuming that they reside on a
8249remote Unix filesystem. No CR/LF translation is done on any files in
8250this case. Invoking using-unix-filesystems with t activates this
8251behavior, and invoking it with any other value deactivates it.
8252
8253** Change in system-type and system-configuration values.
8254
8255The value of system-type on a Linux-based GNU system is now `lignux',
8256not `linux'. This means that some programs which use `system-type'
8257need to be changed. The value of `system-configuration' will also
8258be different.
8259
8260It is generally recommended to use `system-configuration' rather
8261than `system-type'.
8262
8263See the file LINUX-GNU in this directory for more about this.
8264
8265** The functions shell-command and dired-call-process
8266now run file name handlers for default-directory, if it has them.
8267
8268** Undoing the deletion of text now restores the positions of markers
8269that pointed into or next to the deleted text.
8270
8271** Timers created with run-at-time now work internally to Emacs, and
8272no longer use a separate process. Therefore, they now work more
8273reliably and can be used for shorter time delays.
8274
8275The new function run-with-timer is a convenient way to set up a timer
8276to run a specified amount of time after the present. A call looks
8277like this:
8278
8279 (run-with-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
8280
8281SECS says how many seconds should elapse before the timer happens.
8282It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the timer
8283becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments ARGS.
8284
8285REPEAT gives the interval for repeating the timer (measured in
8286seconds). It may be an integer or a floating point number. nil or 0
8287means don't repeat at all--call FUNCTION just once.
8288
8289*** with-timeout provides an easy way to do something but give
8290up if too much time passes.
8291
8292 (with-timeout (SECONDS TIMEOUT-FORMS...) BODY...)
8293
8294This executes BODY, but gives up after SECONDS seconds.
8295If it gives up, it runs the TIMEOUT-FORMS and returns the value
8296of the last one of them. Normally it returns the value of the last
8297form in BODY.
8298
8299*** You can now arrange to call a function whenever Emacs is idle for
8300a certain length of time. To do this, call run-with-idle-timer. A
8301call looks like this:
8302
8303 (run-with-idle-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
8304
8305SECS says how many seconds of idleness should elapse before the timer
8306runs. It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the
8307timer becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments
8308ARGS.
8309
8310Emacs becomes idle whenever it finishes executing a keyboard or mouse
8311command. It remains idle until it receives another keyboard or mouse
8312command.
8313
8314REPEAT, if non-nil, means this timer should be activated again each
8315time Emacs becomes idle and remains idle for SECS seconds The timer
8316does not repeat if Emacs *remains* idle; it runs at most once after
8317each time Emacs becomes idle.
8318
8319If REPEAT is nil, the timer runs just once, the first time Emacs is
8320idle for SECS seconds.
8321
8322*** post-command-idle-hook is now obsolete; you shouldn't use it at
8323all, because it interferes with the idle timer mechanism. If your
8324programs use post-command-idle-hook, convert them to use idle timers
8325instead.
8326
8327*** y-or-n-p-with-timeout lets you ask a question but give up if
8328there is no answer within a certain time.
8329
8330 (y-or-n-p-with-timeout PROMPT SECONDS DEFAULT-VALUE)
8331
8332asks the question PROMPT (just like y-or-n-p). If the user answers
8333within SECONDS seconds, it returns the answer that the user gave.
8334Otherwise it gives up after SECONDS seconds, and returns DEFAULT-VALUE.
8335
8336** Minor change to `encode-time': you can now pass more than seven
8337arguments. If you do that, the first six arguments have the usual
8338meaning, the last argument is interpreted as the time zone, and the
8339arguments in between are ignored.
8340
8341This means that it works to use the list returned by `decode-time' as
8342the list of arguments for `encode-time'.
8343
8344** The default value of load-path now includes the directory
8345/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp In addition to
8346/usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp. You can use this new directory for
8347site-specific Lisp packages that belong with a particular Emacs
8348version.
8349
8350It is not unusual for a Lisp package that works well in one Emacs
8351version to cause trouble in another. Sometimes packages need updating
8352for incompatible changes; sometimes they look at internal data that
8353has changed; sometimes the package has been installed in Emacs itself
8354and the installed version should be used. Whatever the reason for the
8355problem, this new feature makes it easier to solve.
8356
8357** When your program contains a fixed file name (like .completions or
8358.abbrev.defs), the file name usually needs to be different on operating
8359systems with limited file name syntax.
8360
8361Now you can avoid ad-hoc conditionals by using the function
8362convert-standard-filename to convert the file name to a proper form
8363for each operating system. Here is an example of use, from the file
8364completions.el:
8365
8366(defvar save-completions-file-name
8367 (convert-standard-filename "~/.completions")
8368 "*The filename to save completions to.")
8369
8370This sets the variable save-completions-file-name to a value that
8371depends on the operating system, because the definition of
8372convert-standard-filename depends on the operating system. On
8373Unix-like systems, it returns the specified file name unchanged. On
8374MS-DOS, it adapts the name to fit the limitations of that system.
8375
8376** The interactive spec N now returns the numeric prefix argument
8377rather than the raw prefix argument. (It still reads a number using the
8378minibuffer if there is no prefix argument at all.)
8379
8380** When a process is deleted, this no longer disconnects the process
8381marker from its buffer position.
8382
8383** The variable garbage-collection-messages now controls whether
8384Emacs displays a message at the beginning and end of garbage collection.
8385The default is nil, meaning there are no messages.
8386
8387** The variable debug-ignored-errors specifies certain kinds of errors
8388that should not enter the debugger. Its value is a list of error
8389condition symbols and/or regular expressions. If the error has any
8390of the condition symbols listed, or if any of the regular expressions
8391matches the error message, then that error does not enter the debugger,
8392regardless of the value of debug-on-error.
8393
8394This variable is initialized to match certain common but uninteresting
8395errors that happen often during editing.
8396
8397** The new function error-message-string converts an error datum
8398into its error message. The error datum is what condition-case
8399puts into the variable, to describe the error that happened.
8400
8401** Anything that changes which buffer appears in a given window
8402now runs the window-scroll-functions for that window.
8403
8404** The new function get-buffer-window-list returns a list of windows displaying
8405a buffer. The function is called with the buffer (a buffer object or a buffer
8406name) and two optional arguments specifying the minibuffer windows and frames
8407to search. Therefore this function takes optional args like next-window etc.,
8408and not get-buffer-window.
8409
8410** buffer-substring now runs the hook buffer-access-fontify-functions,
8411calling each function with two arguments--the range of the buffer
8412being accessed. buffer-substring-no-properties does not call them.
8413
8414If you use this feature, you should set the variable
8415buffer-access-fontified-property to a non-nil symbol, which is a
8416property name. Then, if all the characters in the buffer range have a
8417non-nil value for that property, the buffer-access-fontify-functions
8418are not called. When called, these functions should put a non-nil
8419property on the text that they fontify, so that they won't get called
8420over and over for the same text.
8421
8422** Changes in lisp-mnt.el
8423
8424*** The lisp-mnt package can now recognize file headers that are written
8425in the formats used by the `what' command and the RCS `ident' command:
8426
8427;; @(#) HEADER: text
8428;; $HEADER: text $
8429
8430in addition to the normal
8431
8432;; HEADER: text
8433
8434*** The commands lm-verify and lm-synopsis are now interactive. lm-verify
8435checks that the library file has proper sections and headers, and
8436lm-synopsis extracts first line "synopsis'"information.
8437
8438
a933dad1 8439\f
3787e12e 8440* For older news, see the file ONEWS
a933dad1
DL
8441
8442----------------------------------------------------------------------
8443Copyright information:
8444
404fa7d6 8445Copyright (C) 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
8446
8447 Permission is granted to anyone to make or distribute verbatim copies
8448 of this document as received, in any medium, provided that the
8449 copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved,
8450 thus giving the recipient permission to redistribute in turn.
8451
8452 Permission is granted to distribute modified versions
8453 of this document, or of portions of it,
8454 under the above conditions, provided also that they
8455 carry prominent notices stating who last changed them.
8456\f
8457Local variables:
8458mode: outline
8459paragraph-separate: "[ \f]*$"
8460end: